Prévia do material em texto

NetNumen U31 R10
Unified Element Management System
Fixed Network Access Equipment
Management
Version: V12.20.20
ZTE CORPORATION
No. 55, Hi-tech Road South, ShenZhen, P.R.China
Postcode: 518057
Tel: +86-755-26771900
URL: http://support.zte.com.cn
E-mail: support@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION
Copyright 2020 ZTE CORPORATION.
The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction
or distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the
prior written consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document
are protected by contractual confidentiality obligations.
All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks,
of ZTE CORPORATION or of their respective owners.
This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or
conditions are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for
a particular purpose, title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable
for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on the information contained herein.
ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or
applications covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written
license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any
license to the subject matter herein.
ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without
further notice.
Users may visit the ZTE technical support website http://support.zte.com.cn to inquire for related
information.
The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Revision No. Revision Date Revision Reason
R1.0 2020-08-30 First Edition
Serial Number: SJ-20200814113823-038
Publishing Date: 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
Contents
1 System Management.................................................................................1-1
1.1 Querying System Information............................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Environment Monitoring Manager.........................................................................1-2
1.3 Hardware Management.........................................................................................1-5
1.3.1 Configuring Devices................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.2 Managing Sub-cards................................................................................ 1-7
1.3.3 Enabling PnP Function............................................................................ 1-8
1.3.4 Switching Between Control and Switching cards.....................................1-9
1.3.5 Resetting a Card.................................................................................... 1-10
1.3.6 Configuring a Card.................................................................................1-10
1.3.7 Resetting or Swapping a Card...............................................................1-14
1.4 Managing Cards..................................................................................................1-15
1.5 Configuring a Trap Server.................................................................................. 1-17
1.6 System Configuration..........................................................................................1-19
1.6.1 Configuring NE Time..............................................................................1-19
1.6.2 Configuring LMI and Packet Rate Limiting............................................ 1-20
1.6.3 Configuring Optical Module....................................................................1-22
1.6.4 Configuring NTP Service (C300)........................................................... 1-24
1.6.5 Configuring NTP Service (C300 v2)...................................................... 1-28
1.6.6 Configuring Environment Management..................................................1-32
1.6.7 Configuring MAC Table Statistic Parameters.........................................1-35
1.6.8 Configuring Overheat Protection (C300)................................................1-36
1.6.9 Configuring Overheat Protection (C300 v2)...........................................1-38
1.6.10 Configuring Emergency Power Saving................................................ 1-39
1.6.11 Configuring Card Parameters in Batches.............................................1-40
1.7 Configuring an MAC Address Pool (C300M)......................................................1-42
1.8 Configuring 12KC and 16KC Signals................................................................. 1-43
1.9 NE File Management.......................................................................................... 1-44
1.9.1 Managing Software Versions................................................................. 1-44
1.9.2 Backing Up or Restoring the Configuration Files................................... 1-46
1.9.3 Backing Up an NE File.......................................................................... 1-49
1.9.4 Updating the ONU Software Immediately.............................................. 1-50
1.9.5 Configuring NE File Server.................................................................... 1-52
I
1.10 CLI and Log Management................................................................................ 1-53
1.10.1 Configuring CLI Global Parameters..................................................... 1-53
1.10.2 Configuring CLI Users..........................................................................1-55
1.10.3 Querying Current CLI Session............................................................. 1-57
1.10.4 Managing NE Logs.............................................................................. 1-59
1.10.5 Backing Up NE Logs to NMS Server or Client.................................... 1-60
1.10.6 Configuring a Syslog Server................................................................ 1-62
1.10.7 Configuring Clock Source.................................................................... 1-63
1.10.8 Configuring External Output Clock.......................................................1-64
1.11 Configuring UAPS Protection............................................................................ 1-65
1.12 Configuring MAC Address Binding or Filtering................................................. 1-67
1.13 Configuring VMAC............................................................................................ 1-68
1.14 Configuring DHCP VMAC................................................................................. 1-70
1.15 Configuring Parameters to Automatically Save Configuration to Flash.............1-71
1.16 Security Management....................................................................................... 1-73
1.16.1 Configuring an SSH Server..................................................................1-73
1.16.2 Configuring SPAN Function................................................................. 1-74
2 Protocol and Service Configuration........................................................2-1
2.1 Opening the NE Protocol Manager Window.........................................................2-1
2.2 Configuring Service Ports..................................................................................... 2-5
2.3 VLAN Management...............................................................................................2-8
2.3.1 Configuring a Static VLAN (C300)........................................................... 2-8
2.3.2 Configuring Port VLAN...........................................................................2-10
2.3.3 ConfiguringSmartGroup Port VLAN (C300 v2)..................................... 2-13
2.3.4 Configuring SmartGroup Port VLAN (C300).......................................... 2-15
2.3.5 Configuring VLAN QinQ.........................................................................2-17
2.3.6 Configuring Reserved VLAN (C300M)...................................................2-18
2.3.7 Configuring VLAN Mapping (C300M).....................................................2-19
2.3.8 Configuring VLAN Translation Function.................................................2-20
2.3.9 Configuring VLAN CoS Mapping........................................................... 2-22
2.3.10 Configuring Global VLAN TPID............................................................2-23
2.3.11 Configuring 1:1 VLAN (C300).............................................................. 2-24
2.3.12 Configuring 1:1 VLAN (C300 v2)......................................................... 2-26
2.3.13 Configuring Interworking VLAN............................................................2-28
2.3.14 Querying Port VLAN Performance.......................................................2-29
2.3.15 Configuring ONU VLAN Translation.....................................................2-30
2.3.16 Configuring VLAN Global Translation (C300)...................................... 2-31
II
2.3.17 Configuring VLAN Global Translation (C300 v2)................................. 2-32
2.3.18 Configuring VLAN Multicast Packet Forwarding Control Function........2-34
2.3.19 Configuring Smart QinQ Global Parameters........................................2-35
2.3.20 Enabling Smart QinQ (C300)............................................................... 2-36
2.3.21 Configuring Smart QinQ.......................................................................2-37
2.3.22 Configuring Smart QinQ Based on Smartgroup...................................2-39
2.3.23 Limiting Port VLAN Rate......................................................................2-41
2.3.24 Limiting VLAN Packet Storm Rate.......................................................2-42
2.3.25 Configuring MVLAN Translation...........................................................2-43
2.3.26 Enabling VLAN CoS Mapping Function............................................... 2-44
2.3.27 Configuring Port MVLAN Translation................................................... 2-45
2.4 Multicast Management........................................................................................ 2-46
2.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................2-46
2.4.2 Configuring IGMP Global Parameters....................................................2-46
2.4.3 Configuring User Interface Parameters..................................................2-49
2.4.4 Configuring IGMP MVLAN..................................................................... 2-51
2.4.5 Configuring an IGMP SPAN VLAN........................................................ 2-54
2.5 IGMP Management............................................................................................. 2-55
2.5.1 Configuring IGMP Global Parameters....................................................2-55
2.5.2 Configuring IGMP UNI Interface Parameters.........................................2-57
2.5.3 Configuring IGMP MVLAN..................................................................... 2-58
2.5.4 Configuring IGMP Receiving Ports........................................................ 2-62
2.5.5 Configuring IGMP Source Ports.............................................................2-63
2.5.6 Configuring IGMP Source Pseudo-wire................................................. 2-64
2.5.7 Configuring IGMP Multicast Group Filtering...........................................2-65
2.5.8 Querying IGMP Dynamic Group Information......................................... 2-66
2.5.9 Querying IGMP Online User Information............................................... 2-67
2.5.10 Configuring IGMP Multicast Group Bandwidth.....................................2-68
2.5.11 Configuring IGMP Multicast Prejoin..................................................... 2-69
2.5.12 Binding IGMP Multicast Static Port......................................................2-71
2.5.13 Querying IGMP Multicast Traffic.......................................................... 2-72
2.5.14 Querying IGMP Active Multicast Group Information............................ 2-73
2.5.15 Querying IGMP Multicast Information.................................................. 2-74
2.6 MLD Multicast Management............................................................................... 2-75
2.6.1 Configuring Global MLD Parameters..................................................... 2-75
2.6.2 Configuring MLD Interface Parameters..................................................2-77
2.6.3 Configuring MLD Multicast VLAN.......................................................... 2-79
III
2.6.4 Configuring an MLD SPAN VLAN..........................................................2-82
2.7 MLD Management...............................................................................................2-83
2.7.1 Configuring MLD Global Parameters..................................................... 2-83
2.7.2 Configuring MLD MVLAN.......................................................................2-85
2.7.3 Configuring MLD Source Ports.............................................................. 2-88
2.7.4 Configuring MLD Source Pseudo-wire...................................................2-89
2.7.5 Configuring MLD Receiving Ports..........................................................2-90
2.7.6 Configuring MLD UNI Interface Parameters.......................................... 2-91
2.7.7 Configuring MLD Multicast Group Filtering............................................ 2-93
2.7.8 Querying MLD Dynamic Group Information...........................................2-94
2.7.9 Querying MLD Online User Information.................................................2-95
2.7.10 Configuring MLD Multicast Group Bandwidth...................................... 2-95
2.7.11 Configuring MLD Multicast Prejoin.......................................................2-97
2.7.12 Binding MLD Multicast Static Port....................................................... 2-98
2.7.13 Querying MLD Active Multicast Group Information.............................. 2-99
2.7.14 Querying MLD Multicast information.................................................. 2-100
2.8 QoS Management............................................................................................. 2-101
2.8.1 Configuring Ethernet Queue Mapping..................................................2-101
2.8.2 Configuring CFI Mapping..................................................................... 2-102
2.8.3 Configuring SCB Queue Mapping........................................................2-103
2.8.4 Profiles..................................................................................................2-105
2.8.5 Port QoS Configuration........................................................................2-130
2.9 DHCP Snooping................................................................................................2-142
2.9.1 Configuring DHCP Snooping Function.................................................2-142
2.9.2 Querying DHCP Snooping Online User Information............................ 2-144
2.9.3 Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Global Function......................................2-145
2.9.4 Configuring DHCPv4 Snooping VLAN................................................. 2-146
2.9.5 Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Port Function..........................................2-147
2.9.6 Limiting DHCPv4 Snooping Sessions.................................................. 2-148
2.9.7 Querying DHCPv4 Snooping Online User Information.........................2-1492.9.8 Configuring DHCPv4 Snooping MAC-anti-spoofing Function.............. 2-150
2.9.9 Configuring DHCP Snooping IP Static Binding Information................. 2-151
2.9.10 Enabling DHCPv6 Snooping Global Function....................................2-152
2.9.11 Configuring DHCPv6 Snooping VLAN............................................... 2-153
2.9.12 Limiting DHCPv6 Snooping Sessions................................................ 2-154
2.9.13 Querying DHCPv6 Snooping Online User Information.......................2-156
2.10 Port Location................................................................................................... 2-156
IV
2.10.1 Configuring Port Identification Function............................................. 2-157
2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port Identification....... 2-163
2.10.3 Configuring a Circuit ID Syntax Profile.............................................. 2-165
2.10.4 Configuring Remote ID.......................................................................2-168
2.10.5 Configure Port Identification (Normal Mode)......................................2-169
2.10.6 Configure Port Identification (Profile Mode)....................................... 2-174
2.10.7 Applying an Operator Profile Globally................................................2-178
2.10.8 Applying an Operator Profile to VLAN............................................... 2-179
2.10.9 Applying an Operator Profile to Port..................................................2-180
2.11 L2 Protocol Management................................................................................ 2-182
2.11.1 ACL..................................................................................................... 2-182
2.11.2 STP..................................................................................................... 2-199
2.11.3 LACP...................................................................................................2-207
2.11.4 IPoA.................................................................................................... 2-213
2.11.5 Querying PPPoA Configuration Information....................................... 2-217
2.12 L3 Protocol Management................................................................................2-218
2.12.1 Configuring a Layer-3 Interface (C300)............................................. 2-218
2.12.2 Configuring a Layer-3 Interface (C300 v2).........................................2-220
2.12.3 Configuring a Static Route (C300 v2)................................................ 2-223
2.12.4 Modifying Out-of-Band IP Interface....................................................2-224
2.12.5 Configuring L3 Interface ND Parameters...........................................2-225
2.12.6 Configuring ARP CoS........................................................................ 2-229
2.12.7 DHCP..................................................................................................2-229
2.12.8 DHCP Relay.......................................................................................2-244
2.12.9 OSPF..................................................................................................2-268
2.12.10 IS-IS..................................................................................................2-277
2.12.11 BGP.................................................................................................. 2-286
2.13 Configuring OSPF (C300)...............................................................................2-288
2.14 NE Security Configuration...............................................................................2-289
2.14.1 Configuring ARP Filtering...................................................................2-289
2.14.2 Configuring IPv6 Filtering...................................................................2-290
2.14.3 Controlling Layer-2 Control Protocol Packets.................................... 2-292
2.14.4 Configuring Maximum MAC Address Learned...................................2-293
2.14.5 Configuring Global Storm Control Parameters...................................2-294
2.14.6 Configuring Port ARP.........................................................................2-295
2.14.7 Controlling Port VLAN Storm Traffic.................................................. 2-297
2.14.8 Controlling Port Storm Traffic (C300).................................................2-298
V
2.14.9 Configuring ND Filtering.....................................................................2-300
2.14.10 Configuring NS Filtering................................................................... 2-301
2.14.11 Limiting VPort Rate.......................................................................... 2-302
2.14.12 Limiting CPU Packet Rate............................................................... 2-303
2.14.13 Limiting CPU Queue Packet Rate....................................................2-305
2.14.14 Configuring ARP MFF Gateway (C300)...........................................2-306
2.14.15 Configuring Anti-DoS Management Parameters (C300).................. 2-308
2.14.16 Configuring MAC Anti-spoofing (C300)............................................2-310
2.14.17 Configuring MAC Anti-Spoofing (C300 v2)...................................... 2-311
2.14.18 Querying CLI Session Information................................................... 2-313
2.14.19 Configuring IP Source Guard Global Parameters (C300)................ 2-314
2.14.20 Configuring IP Source Guard Global Parameters (C300M)............. 2-315
2.14.21 Configuring Port IP Source Guard (C300)....................................... 2-315
2.14.22 Configuring Port IP Source Guard (C300M).................................... 2-317
2.14.23 Configuring Port IP Source Guard (MT)...........................................2-318
2.14.24 Configuring IP Source Guard Global Parameters (C300M v4).........2-320
2.14.25 Configuring Port IP Source Guard (C300M v4)............................... 2-321
2.14.26 Configuring VLAN IP Source Guard................................................ 2-323
2.14.27 Configuring Ethernet Smart Ring..................................................... 2-324
2.14.28 Limiting Protocol Packet Rate..........................................................2-327
2.14.29 Controlling Traffic Flooding.............................................................. 2-327
2.14.30 Configuring Global ND Snooping Parameters................................. 2-328
2.14.31 Configuring VMAC Global Parameters............................................ 2-329
2.14.32 Configuring a VMAC Profile............................................................. 2-330
2.14.33 Configuring VMAC Address Translation Function based on
VLAN................................................................................................. 2-332
2.14.34 Configuring VMAC Address Translation Function Based on Port.....2-333
2.14.35 Querying VMAC Address Translation Information............................2-334
2.14.36 Configuring Reserved MAC............................................................. 2-335
2.14.37 Limiting VLAN Packet Rate Globally................................................2-336
2.14.38 Configuring Port Protection/Isolation Function................................. 2-338
2.14.39 Configuring Port VLAN Maximum MAC Address Learned............... 2-340
2.14.40 AAA...................................................................................................2-341
2.14.41 TACACS+......................................................................................... 2-351
2.14.42 RADIUS............................................................................................ 2-355
3 Device Configuration and Management..................................................3-1
3.1 Port Management..................................................................................................3-1VI
3.1.1 Configuring the Uplink Port......................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Configuring EPON Ports........................................................................ 3-10
3.1.3 Configuring GPON Ports........................................................................3-16
3.2 PON Global Configuration Management............................................................ 3-21
3.2.1 Profile Configuration...............................................................................3-21
3.2.2 Configuring an OLT IP Address Pool.....................................................3-81
3.2.3 Managing ONU IP Addresses................................................................3-82
3.2.4 Configuring an ONU IGMP Profile......................................................... 3-83
3.2.5 Configuring PON Authentication Mode.................................................. 3-86
3.2.6 Configuring EPON OLT Encryption Parameters.................................... 3-88
3.2.7 Configuring PON Port Protection........................................................... 3-89
3.2.8 Duplicating PON Port Configuration Data..............................................3-92
3.2.9 Managing Unauthenticated ONUs......................................................... 3-93
3.2.10 Viewing the ONU Topology Graph.......................................................3-98
3.2.11 Configuring Hand-in-hand Protection................................................... 3-99
3.2.12 Configuring EPON Hand-in-hand Protection......................................3-102
3.2.13 Configuring an SLA Profile.................................................................3-105
3.2.14 Configuring Constant Optical Detection............................................. 3-107
3.2.15 Configuring OTDR Test Link.............................................................. 3-108
3.3 ONU Management............................................................................................ 3-110
3.3.1 Managing an ONU............................................................................... 3-111
3.3.2 Querying ONU Detailed Information.................................................... 3-116
3.3.3 Restoring ONU Factory Settings..........................................................3-117
3.3.4 Updating MDU Topology Nodes...........................................................3-119
3.3.5 Configuring EPON UNI Ports...............................................................3-121
3.3.6 Configuring GPON UNI Ports.............................................................. 3-125
3.3.7 Configuring the Maintenance and Diagnosis Management..................3-133
3.4 PON CES Configuration................................................................................... 3-135
3.4.1 Modifying CES UNI Configuration........................................................3-135
3.4.2 Configuring ONU CES Profile.............................................................. 3-137
3.4.3 Configuring CES Link...........................................................................3-140
3.4.4 Configuring TDM Interface................................................................... 3-142
3.4.5 Configuring CES Global Parameters................................................... 3-144
3.4.6 Configuring CES Loopback..................................................................3-145
3.4.7 Configuring PW Connection.................................................................3-146
3.4.8 Configuring an OLT CES Attribute Profile............................................3-148
3.4.9 Configuring SONET Interface.............................................................. 3-150
VII
3.4.10 Configure CES Protection.................................................................. 3-151
3.4.11 Querying CES Optical Power Information.......................................... 3-153
3.4.12 Configuring a CES Offline Profile.......................................................3-154
4 xDSL Configuration...................................................................................4-1
4.1 ADSL Profile Management................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Configuring an ADSL Line Profile............................................................4-1
4.1.2 Configuring an ADSL Alarm Profile......................................................... 4-5
4.1.3 Configuring an ADSL Offline Line Profile.................................................4-8
4.2 VDSL Profile Management................................................................................. 4-10
4.2.1 Configuring a VDSL Line Profile (4 Profile Mode)................................. 4-10
4.2.2 Configuring a VDSL Line Profile (TR252-TR165 Object Model Profile
Mode)...................................................................................................4-11
4.2.3 Configuring a VDSL Line Base Profile...................................................4-14
4.2.4 Configuring a VDSL Line INM Profile.................................................... 4-17
4.2.5 Configuring a VDSL Line Service Profile............................................... 4-19
4.2.6 Configuring a VDSL Line DPBO Profile (C300M).................................. 4-22
4.2.7 Configuring a VDSL Line DPBO Profile (C300M v4)............................. 4-23
4.2.8 Configuring a VDSL Line UPBO Profile (C300M).................................. 4-25
4.2.9 Configuring a VDSL Line UPBO Profile (C300M v4)............................. 4-27
4.2.10 Configuring a VDSL Line Downstream Data Rate Profile.................... 4-29
4.2.11 Configuring a VDSL Line Upstream Data Rate Profile.........................4-31
4.2.12 Configuring a VDSL Line Emergency Rate Adjustment Profile............ 4-33
4.2.13 Configuring a VDSL Line SNR Margin Profile..................................... 4-35
4.2.14 Configuring a VDSL Line Delay and INP Profile..................................4-38
4.2.15 Configuring a VDSL Line Virtual Noise Profile.....................................4-39
4.2.16 Configuring a VDSL Line RFI Profile................................................... 4-41
4.2.17 Configuring a VDSL Line Spectrum Profile..........................................4-43
4.2.18 Configuring a VDSL Alarm Profile....................................................... 4-47
4.2.19 Configuring a VDSL Offline Line Profile...............................................4-50
4.2.20 Configuring a VDSL Offline Line Profile (4 Profile Mode).....................4-52
4.2.21 Configuring a VDSL Offline Line Profile (11 Model Profile Mode)........ 4-54
4.3 SHDSL Profile Management...............................................................................4-56
4.3.1 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile....................................................... 4-56
4.3.2 Configuring an SHDSL Alarm Profile.....................................................4-58
4.3.3 Configuring an SHDSL Offline Line Profile............................................ 4-60
4.4 Configuring an xDSL Extended Profile............................................................... 4-62
4.5 Configuring an xDSL Offline Extended Profile....................................................4-64
VIII
4.6 Configuring xDSL Port Bonding (C300M)...........................................................4-65
4.7 Configuring xDSL Port Bonding (C300M v4)......................................................4-68
4.8 Querying the xDSL Port Bonding Status (C300M)............................................. 4-70
4.9 Querying the xDSL Port Bonding Status (C300M v4)........................................ 4-71
4.10 Replacing the Maximum Learned MAC Addresses in Batches.........................4-72
4.11 Configuring DSL Ports in Batches.................................................................... 4-74
4.12 Configuring VectoringGlobal Parameters.........................................................4-79
5 Narrowband Service Configuration.........................................................5-1
5.1 MG Configuration.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Configuring the MGC............................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Configuring the MG..................................................................................5-3
5.1.3 Configuring the MG IP Address...............................................................5-6
5.1.4 Configuring the VoIP VLAN..................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5 Configuring the NAT.................................................................................5-9
5.1.6 Configuring the MGC Type.................................................................... 5-10
5.1.7 Configuring the MD5.............................................................................. 5-12
5.1.8 Configuring a Ringing Profile................................................................. 5-13
5.1.9 Configuring VoIP QoS............................................................................5-15
5.1.10 Configuring Call Optimization...............................................................5-16
5.1.11 Configuring Call Limiting...................................................................... 5-17
5.1.12 Configuring Call Limiting for the Uplink Port........................................ 5-19
5.2 VoIP Resource Configuration..............................................................................5-20
5.2.1 Configuring DSP.....................................................................................5-20
5.2.2 Configuring IPS...................................................................................... 5-22
5.2.3 Configuring IPS TID............................................................................... 5-23
5.2.4 Configuring the Conference Resource...................................................5-25
5.2.5 Configuring RTP.....................................................................................5-26
5.2.6 Configuring the Digit Map...................................................................... 5-28
5.3 SIP Management................................................................................................ 5-29
5.3.1 Configuring the SIP Proxy Server..........................................................5-29
5.3.2 Configuring the SIP User Agent.............................................................5-31
5.3.3 Configuring the SIP Global Parameters.................................................5-33
5.3.4 Configuring the SIP Access Code......................................................... 5-36
5.3.5 Configuring the SIP Generation Format.................................................5-37
5.4 ISDN Management..............................................................................................5-39
5.4.1 Configuring the Application Server........................................................ 5-39
5.4.2 Configuring the Application Server Process.......................................... 5-41
IX
5.4.3 Configuring the Relation Between the AS and ASP.............................. 5-42
5.4.4 Configuring the DLink............................................................................ 5-43
5.4.5 Querying the ISDN Port Active Status...................................................5-45
5.4.6 Configuring ISDN Remote Power Supply.............................................. 5-46
5.5 V5 Management..................................................................................................5-47
5.5.1 Configuring the V5 Service.................................................................... 5-47
5.5.2 Viewing the V5 E1 Link Timeslot........................................................... 5-52
5.6 Configuring the DDN...........................................................................................5-53
5.7 Configuring the Voice Services...........................................................................5-55
6 Fault Diagnosis......................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Configuring Global CFM....................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Configuring Ethernet CFM.................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Configuring Ethernet EFM.................................................................................. 6-12
6.4 Performing Routine Test..................................................................................... 6-17
6.5 Performing the Narrowband Line Test................................................................ 6-20
6.6 Signaling Trace................................................................................................... 6-22
6.6.1 Performing H.248 Signaling Trace......................................................... 6-22
6.6.2 Performing SIP Signaling Trace.............................................................6-27
6.7 Configuring the MAC Address Table Based on Port...........................................6-28
6.8 Diagnosing a PON Optical Module.....................................................................6-31
6.9 Configuring the Rogue ONU Detecting Function................................................6-33
6.10 Querying a MAC Address.................................................................................6-34
6.11 Performing the Service Simulation Test............................................................ 6-36
6.12 Managing User Information...............................................................................6-38
6.13 Configuring Loopback Detection.......................................................................6-40
6.14 Querying Loopback Status................................................................................6-41
7 Service Scenarios..................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 NE Commissioning Scenarios.............................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Configuring the Trap Server.....................................................................7-1
7.1.2 Configuring the NE System Time............................................................ 7-2
7.1.3 Configuring NTP.......................................................................................7-2
7.1.4 Configuring the NE Hardware..................................................................7-2
7.1.5 Upgrading the NE Version....................................................................... 7-2
7.1.6 Configuring Profiles.................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.7 Configuring the SVLAN............................................................................7-3
7.1.8 Configuring the Multicast Global Data..................................................... 7-3
7.1.9 Configuring the QoS Profile..................................................................... 7-4
X
7.1.10 Configuring the Uplink Port....................................................................7-4
7.1.11 Configuring the MG and MGC............................................................... 7-4
7.1.12 Configuring the Media and Signaling IP Address and Route................. 7-4
7.1.13 Configuring the VoIP Resources............................................................7-5
7.1.14 Configuring the Media NAT....................................................................7-5
7.1.15 Configuring VoIP Uplink Data................................................................ 7-5
7.2 Port Service Provisioning Scenarios.....................................................................7-57.2.1 Configuring Ethernet Uplink Ports............................................................7-5
7.2.2 Configuring ADSL Ports (C300M)..........................................................7-16
7.2.3 Configuring VDSL Ports (C300M)..........................................................7-22
7.2.4 Configuring SHDSL Ports (C300M)....................................................... 7-29
7.2.5 Configuring POTS Ports.........................................................................7-35
7.2.6 Configuring GPON Ports........................................................................7-40
7.3 Fault Diagnosis Scenarios.................................................................................. 7-46
7.3.1 Diagnosing Broadband Faults................................................................7-46
7.3.2 Diagnosing Narrowband Faults..............................................................7-50
8 OLT Commissioning Configuration.........................................................8-1
9 FTTB ONU Configuration......................................................................... 9-1
9.1 EPON FTTB Configuration................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Adding an EPON ONU............................................................................ 9-1
9.1.2 Authenticating an EPON ONU.................................................................9-3
9.1.3 NE Creation..............................................................................................9-5
9.1.4 Global Parameter Configuration...............................................................9-9
9.1.5 Configuring an ADSL Offline Line Profile...............................................9-17
9.1.6 Service Configuration............................................................................. 9-18
9.2 ZXA10 F822 Configuration................................................................................. 9-34
9.2.1 Adding a GPON ONU............................................................................9-35
9.2.2 Authenticating a GPON ONU.................................................................9-36
9.2.3 NE Creation............................................................................................9-39
9.2.4 Global Parameter Configuration.............................................................9-39
9.2.5 Service Configuration............................................................................. 9-39
10 ONU Pre-deployment............................................................................ 10-1
11 FTTB ONU Service Provisioning..........................................................11-1
11.1 9806H Service Provisioning.............................................................................. 11-1
11.1.1 Provisioning the 9806H Broadband Service.........................................11-1
11.1.2 Provisioning the 9806H Multicast Service............................................ 11-4
11.1.3 Provisioning the 9806H VoIP Service...................................................11-7
XI
11.2 F822 Service Provisioning.................................................................................11-9
11.2.1 Provisioning the F822 Broadband Service........................................... 11-9
11.2.2 Provisioning the F822 Multicast Service.............................................11-12
11.2.3 Provisioning the F822 VoIP Service................................................... 11-15
12 FTTH ONU Service Provisioning......................................................... 12-1
12.1 EPON ONU Service Provisioning..................................................................... 12-1
12.1.1 Adding an EPON ONU........................................................................ 12-1
12.1.2 Authenticating an EPON ONU............................................................. 12-3
12.1.3 Provisioning the Broadband Service....................................................12-5
12.1.4 Provisioning the Multicast Service....................................................... 12-9
12.1.5 Provisioning the VoIP Service............................................................12-15
12.2 GPON ONU Service Provisioning...................................................................12-23
12.2.1 Adding a GPON ONU........................................................................ 12-23
12.2.2 Authenticating a GPON ONU.............................................................12-25
12.2.3 Provisioning the Broadband Service..................................................12-28
12.2.4 Provisioning the Multicast Service..................................................... 12-36
12.2.5 Provisioning the VoIP Service............................................................12-44
13 Routine Maintenance............................................................................ 13-1
13.1 Managing ONUs Centrally................................................................................ 13-1
13.2 ONU Version Update Management.................................................................. 13-7
13.2.1 Downloading ONU Version files...........................................................13-7
13.2.2 Managing ONU Version Update Tasks.............................................. 13-10
13.2.3 Querying ONU Version Update Information....................................... 13-17
13.3 Configuring VPort Layer-2 General Parameters............................................. 13-18
13.4 Collecting Resource Statistics.........................................................................13-20
13.5 Collecting Alarm Statistics.............................................................................. 13-22
13.6 Upgrading the NE Version.............................................................................. 13-24
13.7 Upgrading the NE Version.............................................................................. 13-25
13.8 Checking the Policy Execution....................................................................... 13-27
13.9 Managing Logs................................................................................................13-29
13.10 Enabling the Telnet/SSH tools...................................................................... 13-30
13.11 Running Script in Batches.............................................................................13-31
13.12 Modifying the ONU Attributes in Batches..................................................... 13-32
13.13 Synchronizing MDU NE Name and ONU Name...........................................13-36
13.14 Configuring ONU Service Level in Batches.................................................. 13-37
13.15 Managing ODN Splitters............................................................................... 13-39
14 Alarm and Fault Handling.................................................................... 14-1
XII
14.1 Alarm and Fault Handling Flow........................................................................ 14-1
14.2 Querying and Locating ONU In the Whole Network......................................... 14-5
14.3 Handling an ONU Alarm................................................................................... 14-8
14.4 Handling an ONU Fault.................................................................................. 14-10
14.5 Port Fault Handling......................................................................................... 14-13
14.5.1 Handling FTTB ONU Broadband Port Fault.......................................14-14
14.5.2 Handling FTTB ONU VoIP Port Faults...............................................14-19
14.5.3 Handling FTTH ONU VoIP Port Faults.............................................. 14-24
15 Supporting System Operations........................................................... 15-1
15.1 NetNumen U31 Configuration Center...............................................................15-1
15.1.1 Starting the Configuration Center........................................................ 15-1
15.1.2 Configuring the Backup Parameters of the NMS Server
Database............................................................................................. 15-3
15.1.3 Configuring Server Process Instances.................................................15-4
15.1.4 Configuring the FTP Service................................................................15-6
15.1.5 Configuring the Trap Filter Mode......................................................... 15-8
15.1.6 Configuring the MOC Type.................................................................. 15-9
15.1.7 Configuring the MOC Name Rule...................................................... 15-10
15.1.8 Configuring the Database Connection............................................... 15-11
15.1.9 Configuring the OS NTP Parameters.................................................15-15
15.1.10 Configuring Parameters for the Northbound Interface SNMP.......... 15-16
15.1.11 Configuring Parameters for the Northbound Interface TL1...............15-17
15.1.12 Configuring Digital Input Device.......................................................15-19
15.1.13 Configuring Digital Output Device....................................................15-20
15.1.14 Configuring Parameters for the Narrowband Line Test Result
Analysis............................................................................................. 15-21
15.1.15 Configuring Parameters for the MELT Test Result Analysis.............15-22
15.2 Deleting Temporary Files................................................................................ 15-23
15.3 Backing Up and Restoring the NetNumen U31 Databases............................ 15-24
15.4 Exporting Diagnosis Logs............................................................................... 15-33
Figures............................................................................................................... I
Tables........................................................................................................XXXIII
Glossary........................................................................................................ LIV
XIII
XIV
Chapter 1
System Management
Table of Contents
Querying System Information........................................................................................ 1-1
Environment Monitoring Manager..................................................................................1-2
Hardware Management..................................................................................................1-5
Managing Cards...........................................................................................................1-15
Configuring a Trap Server........................................................................................... 1-17
System Configuration...................................................................................................1-19
Configuring an MAC Address Pool (C300M)...............................................................1-42
Configuring 12KC and 16KC Signals.......................................................................... 1-43
NE File Management................................................................................................... 1-44
CLI and Log Management...........................................................................................1-53
Configuring UAPS Protection...................................................................................... 1-65
Configuring MAC Address Binding or Filtering............................................................1-67
Configuring VMAC....................................................................................................... 1-68
Configuring DHCP VMAC............................................................................................1-70
Configuring Parameters to Automatically Save Configuration to Flash....................... 1-71
Security Management.................................................................................................. 1-73
1.1 Querying System Information
This procedure describes how to query and configure the system information.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management
> System Information. The System Information window is displayed, see Figure
1-1. This window shows the system information, including the system name, system
location, and system up-time.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-1
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-1 System Information Window
3. (Optional) Configure the system parameters, and then click Apply.
The System Name parameter is used to identify different NEs in command line
mode.
--end--
Results
When you log on to the NE in command line mode, System Name is displayed in front
of the prompt (#), see Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 System Name
1.2 Environment Monitoring Manager
In the Environment-monitoring Manager window, you can configure the device
temperature threshold value, set the fan speed, query the related information about
card, power device, and fan.
Use the following method to open the Environment-monitoring Manager window.
1-2 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
 Note
The parameters in the Environment-monitoring Manager window vary with the NE
type.
For the ZXA10 C300M, ZXA10 C300M v4, and ZXMSG 5200 v3 devices
In the Rack window, right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System
Management > Environment–monitoring Manager. The Environment–monitoring
Manager window is displayed, see Figure 1-3, Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-3 Environment Monitoring Manager Window of C300M
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-3
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-4 Environment Monitoring Manager Window of C300M v4
Figure 1-5 Environment Monitoring Manager Window of ZXMSG 5200 v3
For the ZXA10 C300 devices
In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client,
right-click the NE, and choose System Management > More > Environment–
1-4 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
monitoring Manager. The Environment–monitoring Manager window is displayed,
see Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-6 Environment Monitoring Manager Window of C300
1.3 Hardware Management
1.3.1 Configuring Devices
This procedure describes how to add an NE rack, shelf, and service card.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose System Management > Device
Configuration. The Device Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 1-7.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-5
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-7 Device Configuration Window
2. Add a rack.
a. In the left navigation tree, select the NE, and then click New to open the Add
Rack dialogue box.
b. Select a rack type.
 Note
The ZXA10 C300M can only be configured with one rack.
3. Add a shelf.
a. In the left navigation tree, select the rack, and then click New to open the Add
Shelf dialogue box.
b. Configure the shelf type. Table 1-1 describes the parameters.
Table 1-1 Description of Shelf Parameters
Parameter Description
Shelf Shelf number
Logic Shelf Use the default value
4. Add a card.
1-6 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
a. In the left navigation tree, select the shelf, and then click New to open the Add
Card dialogue box.
b. Select a card slot and a card type.
--end--
1.3.2Managing Sub-cards
This procedure describes how to manage sub-cards, including add a card, and querying
the card version.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management > 
Subcard Configuration. The Subcard Confutation window is displayed, see Figure
1-8.
Figure 1-8 Subcard Configuration Window
3. In the Subcard Confutation window, you can perform the following operations.
To Do This
Add a sub-card a. Click New to open the New Subcard dialogue box.
b. Configure the sub-card parameters, and then click OK. Table
1-2 describes the parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-7
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
Query the version
information of a sub-bcard
Select the sub-card and then click View Version to open the View
Version dialogue box, which shows the main software type, main
version, and others.
Table 1-2 Description of Sub-card Parameters
Parameter Description
Slot Slot number of the control and switching card
Subcard Subcard number
The control and switching card supports only one subcard, so this value
can only be 1.
Subcard Type  MAPP: VoIP common mode, in which a VoIP processing card is also
needed
 VoIP: VoIP compact mode, in which no VoIP processing card is
required
 Note
You only need to configure the MAPP/VoIP subcard for the active control and
switching card, and the corresponding sub-card configuration of other control and
switch cards will be synchronized automatically.
--end--
1.3.3 Enabling PnP Function
This procedure describes how to enable the PnP function. After the PnP function is
enabled, the system automatically adds the rack, shelf, control and switching card, and
service cards. You do not need to add them manually.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management > 
PnP Enabling. The PnP Enabling window is displayed, see Figure 1-9.
1-8 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-9 PnP Enabling Window
3. Select one option from the PnP Enabling drop-down list. Table 1-3describes the
options.
Table 1-3 Description of PnP Options
Option Description
Enabled When the PnP function is enabled, the rack, active shelf, control
and switching card of the active shelf, and service cards are added
automatically.
The standby shelf needs to be added manually, and then the system
automatically adds the control and switching card and service cards of the
standby shelf.
By default, the PnP function is enabled.
Disabled When the PnP function is disabled, the rack, active/standby shelf, control
and switching card of the sstandby shelf, and service cards need to be
added manually.
The system automatically adds the control and switching card after the rack
and active shelf are added.
4. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
1.3.4 Switching Between Control and Switching cards
This procedure describes how to switch between the active control and switching card
and standby control and switching card.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the active control and switching card, and then choose Swap Card. The 
Swap Card window is displayed.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-9
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
3. Click Swap and the system switch the service to the standby control and switching
card.
--end--
1.3.5 Resetting a Card
This procedure describes how to reset a card.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click a card and then choose Reset Card. The Reset Card window is
displayed.
3. Click Reset.
--end--
1.3.6 Configuring a Card
This procedure describes how to add or delete a service card.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
The Rack window of ZXA10 C300 is as shown in Figure 1-10.
1-10 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-10 ZXA10 C300 Rack Window
The Rack window of ZXA10 C300 v2 is as shown in Figure 1-11.
Figure 1-11 ZXA10 C300 v2 Rack Window
The Rack window of ZXA10 C300M is as shown in Figure 1-12.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-11
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-12 ZXA10 C300M Rack Window
The Rack window of ZXA10 C300M v4 is as shown in Figure 1-13.
1-12 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-13 ZXA10 C300M v4 Rack Window
The Rack window of ZXA10 C350M v4 is as shown in Figure 1-14.
Figure 1-14 ZXA10 C350M v4 Rack Window
2. In the Rack window, you can add or delete a card.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-13
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
Add a card a. Right-click a blank slot and choose Add Card to open the Add
Card dialogue box.
b. Select a card, and then click OK.
Delete a card a. Right-click a card and choose Delete Card. A Confirm
dialogue box is displayed.
b. Click OK to delete the card.
--end--
1.3.7 Resetting or Swapping a Card
This procedure describes how to reset or swap a card.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose System Management > Reset/Swap
Card. The Reset/Swap Card window is displayed, see Figure 1-15.
Figure 1-15 Reset/Swap Card Window
2. In the Reset/Swap Card window, you can perform the following operations.
To Do This
Reset a service card
a. Click to open the Select Card dialogue box.
b. Select the service card, and then click OK.
c. Click Reset to reset the card.
Swap the control and switching
card
a. Click to open the Select Card dialogue box.
b. Select the control and switching card, and then click OK.
c. Click Swap to swap the control and switching card.
--end--
1-14 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
1.4 Managing Cards
This procedure describes how to manage the NE cards, including querying the card
information, querying the current alarms, managing ports, adding/deleting cards, and
managing the card software.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client
window, right-click the NE and choose Card Manager. The Card Manager window is
displayed, see Figure 1-16. This window shows the card status, software, hardware,
memory usage, and other information.
Figure 1-16 Card Manager Window
2. In the Card Manager window, you can perform the following operations.
To Do This
Query and handle the current
active alarms
a. Right-click a card and choose Active Alarms to open
the Active Alarms dialogue box.
b. In the Active Alarms dialogue box, right-click an alarm
and select an option to handle the alarm. Table 1-4
describes handling operations.
Query and configure the card
information
a. Right-click a card and choose Details to open the Card
Information window. The Card Information window
shows the CPU load, memory usage, and software
version.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-15
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
b. Click Modify to open the Modify Card Information
dialogue box.
c. Configurethe card parameters. Table 1-5 describes the
parameters.
d. After the configuration, click OK.
e. (Optional) Click Reset to the reset the card.
f. (Optional) Click Swap to the switch the service between
the active control and switching card and the standby
control and switching card.
Manage ports a. Right-click a card and choose Port Management to
open the Port Manager window.
b. Manage the ports according to the request. For more
information about managing the ports, see 7.2 Port
Service Provisioning Scenarios.
Add/delete a card a. Click Device Configuration to open the Device
Configuration window.
b. Add or delete a card according to the request. For
more information about card configuration, see 1.3.1
Configuring Devices.
Manage software version a. Click Software Management to open the Software
Management window.
b. Upload, download, synchronize, or swap software
according to the request. For more information about
managing software, see 1.9.1 Managing Software
Versions.
Reset a card Right-click a card and select Reset to reset the card.
Swap the control and switching
card
Right-click the active control and switching card, and
choose Swap to switch the services to the standby control
and switching card.
Table 1-4 Active Alarm Handling Operations
Button Description
Query the active alarms by severity Select one severity from the Severity drop-down list.
Query the active alarms by
acknowledgement state
Select one acknowledgement state from the ACK State
drop-down list.
Query the active alarms by visibility Select one visibility option from the Visibility drop-down
list.
Export the active alarm list to the
local disk Click .
1-16 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Button Description
You can choose to export all the columns of the alarms or
the visible columns of the alarms.
Print the active alarm list
Click .
Stop/continue refreshing the alarm
list in real time Click .
Customize the alarm parameters
that are displayed in the Active
Alarms dialogue box
Click .
Handle the alarm Right-click one alarm, and choose one option from the
shortcut menu to handle the alarm.
Table 1-5 Description of Card Information Parameters
Parameter Description
CPU Load Threshold When the CPU usage exceeds this threshold, an alarm is reported.
Memory Usage
Threshold
When the memory usage exceeds this threshold, an alarm is reported.
Power Saving Mode The device service cards still consume power even though they
provide no access services. This parameter allows the user to cut off
the power supply without manually pulling out the cards from the shelf.
To resume the power supply for the card in power saving mode, set the
Power Saving Mode to Disabled.
 Disabled: The card is in normal mode, and the card consumes
power.
 Enabled: The card is in power saving mode, and the card power
supply is cut off.
Lock Status  Enabled: The subscriber services on the card are interrupted.
 Disabled: The subscriber services on the card are normal.
--end--
1.5 Configuring a Trap Server
This procedure describes how to configure a trap server. The NE alarms are reported to
the trap server for the analysis and maintenance purpose.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-17
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management
> SNMP Trap Server. The Trap Server Configuration window is displayed, see 
Figure 1-17.
Figure 1-17 Trap Server Configuration Window
3. Add a trap server.
a. Click New to open the Trap Server Configuration dialogue box.
b. Configure the trap server parameters. Table 1-6 describes the parameters.
Table 1-6 Description of Trap Server Parameters
Parameter Description
ID Trap server ID
Trap Enabling  Enabled: Enable the alarm reporting function.
 Disabled: Disable the alarm reporting function.
IP Address Type Specify the IP address type of the trap server.
IPv4 Address Specify the IPv4 address of the trap server, which is usually set to
be the IP address of the NMS server.
IPv6 Address Specify the IPv6 address of the trap server, which is usually set to
be the IP address of the NMS server.
1-18 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Parameter Description
SNMP Version The NE reports alarms to the trap server throughSNMP protocol.
This parameter should be consistent with the SNMP version of the
NE.
SNMP Community This parameter should be consistent with the SNMP community of
the NE.
Event Format It is recommended to use the default value Snmp Trap.
Received Event Level Specify the lowest severity level of the alarms that need to be
reported.
The NE only reports the alarms of the specify level or higher level.
ZTE NMS Server Specify whether the trap server works as ZTE NMS server.
Receive Port Trap server port used to receive the NE alarm information
c. After the configuration, click OK.
 Note
Select Apply to NEs in Batch to configure the trap server for multiple NEs in
batches.
4. (Optional) To modify a trap server, select it and click Modify.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Modify the trap server
parameters
1. Select one trap server and click Modify to open the Modify
Trap Server dialogue box.
2. Modify the trap server parameters, and then click OK.
1.6 System Configuration
1.6.1 Configuring NE Time
This procedure describes how to configure the NE time. you can choose to specify the
NE local time or choose to synchronize the NE time with the NMS server.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-19
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management > 
NE Time. The NE Time window is displayed, see Figure 1-18.
Figure 1-18 NE Time Window
3. Configure the NE time. Table 1-7 describes the parameters.
Table 1-7 Description of NE Time Parameters
Parameter Description
NE Time  Using NE Time: Configure the NE current time.
 Using NMS Time: The NE time is synchronized with the NMS
server time.
4. After the configuration, click Apply.
 Note
Select Apply to NEs in Batch to configure the NE time for multiple NEs in batches.
--end--
1.6.2 Configuring LMI and Packet Rate Limiting
This procedure describes how to enable the local management interface function and
limit the rate of packets that the NE can receive.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
1-20 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management > 
LMI Enabling and Rate Limiting. The LMI Enabling and Rate Limiting window is
displayed, see Figure 1-19.
Figure 1-19 LMI Enabling and Rate Limiting Window
3. Configure the LMI and rate limit parameters. Table 1-8 describes the parameters.
Table 1-8 Description of LMI and Rate Limit Parameters
Parameter Description
Craft Terminal Interface  Enable: Users can use CLI command to manage the device
through the NE serial interface or out-of-band NM interface.
 Disable: Users are not allowed to use the NE serial interface
and out-of-band NM interface to manage the device by CLI
commands.
Maximum Frame Size Configure the maximum size of the frames that the NE forwards.
Broadcast Rate Limited Configure the maximum rate that the NE forwards the broadcast
packets.
Multicast Rate Limited Configure the maximum rate that the NE forwards the multicastpackets.
Unknowncast Rate Limited Configure the maximum rate that the NE forwards the
unknowncast or flooding packets.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-21
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
4. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
1.6.3 Configuring Optical Module
This procedure introduces how to configure the optical module for the uplink cards. You
can create an alarm profile and apply it to the specified optical module. If the system
detects the optical power, temperature and other factors are out of the specified range,
alarms are generated.
Steps
Opening the Optical Module Configuration window
2. Use one of the following methods to open the Optical Module Configuration
window.
Method Description
Method 1 a. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management
System – Client window, right-click the NE and choose Port
Manager. The Port Manager window is displayed.
b. In the left Topo Root navigation tree of the Port Manager
window, double-click the uplink card and display the detailed port
information in the right pane.
c. Choose Advanced > Optical Module Configuration, and the 
Optical Module Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
1-20.
Method 2 a. In the NE Rack window, right-click the uplink card, and choose Port
Manager, and the Port Manager window is displayed.
b. Choose Advanced > Optical Module Configuration, and the 
Optical Module Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
1-20.
Method 3 In the NE Rack window, right-click the PON card, and choose Optical
Module Configuration, and the Optical Module Configuration
window is displayed.
The Optical Module Configuration window displays the optical module information
of the uplink card, including the alarm profiles applied to the optical module, the
received/transmitted optical power, link rate, and supply voltage.
1-22 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-20 Optical Module Configuration Window
(Optional) Creating an alarm profile
4. In the Optical Module Configuration window, click Alarm Profiles, and the Optical
Module Alarm Profiles window is displayed.
5. Select New in the left profile list, and then specify the parameters according to the
request.
6. Specify the alarm profile name, and then click New.
(Optional) Applying the alarm profile to the optical module
8. In the Optical Module Configuration window, select the optical module and click 
Modify. The Modify Optical Module Configuration window is displayed.
9. Select the alarm profile from the Alarm Profile Name drop-down list, and then click 
OK.
--end--
Related Tasks
Perform the following operations to configure the ALS function.
1. In the Optical Module Alarm Profiles window, select one optical module, and then
click ALS to open the ALS dialogue box, see Figure 1-21.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-23
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-21 ALS Dialogue Box
2. Configure the ALS parameters. Table 1-9 describes the parameters.
Table 1-9 Description of ALS Parameters
Parameter Description
ALS Enabling Configure whether to enable the ALS function for the optical
module.
LOS Duration Configure the time to postpone shutting down the optical
module after the optical module detects no optical signals are
received.
Laser Shutdown Duration Configure the time interval to open the optical module again
after the optical module is shut down.
Laser Startup Duration Configure the time to keep the optical module open after the
optical module is opened again.
3. After the configuration, click OK.
1.6.4 Configuring NTP Service (C300)
This procedure describes how to configure the NTP services. After the NTP service is
configured, the NE automatically synchronizes time with the NTP server periodically to
ensure the correct NE time.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client
window, right-click the NE and choose System Management > NTP Service. The 
NTP Service Management window is displayed, see Figure 1-22.
1-24 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-22 NTP Service Management Window
2. Configure the NTP service parameters. Table 1-10 describes the parameters.
Table 1-10 Description of NTP Service Parameters
Parameter Description
NTP Status  Enable: The NE synchronizes time with the NTP server.
 Disable: The NE uses the local time.
Main/Backup NTP Server
IP Address
Specify the IP address of the master/backup NTP server.
When the NMS server works as the NTP server, this address
is set to be the NMS server IP address. The NTP service of the
NMS server or the NTP service of the OS where the NMS server
program runs needs to be enabled.
NTP Client IP Address Specify the source IP address of the request packet that the NTP
client sends to the NTP server. By default, it is the NMS server IP
address.
NTP Protocol Version This parameter should be consistent with the NTP server
configuration. It can be 1, 2, or 3.
Synchronization Interval (s) Time interval that the NE synchronizes time with the NTP server
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-25
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
Default: 300 s
Current Service Status The status of the current NTP service
Current NTP Server IP
Address
The current NTP server IP address
Current Clock Offset (s) Current clock offset between the NE and the NTP server
Clock Offset Alarming
Threshold
When the clock offset between the NE and the NTP server exceeds
this threshold, an alarm is reported.
Default: 7 s
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
 Note
Select Apply to NEs in Batch to configure the NTP service parameters for multiple
NEs in batches.
--end--
Related Tasks
To use the NMS server as the NTP server, perform the following operations to enable
the NTP service of the NMS server:
1. Open the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Configuration Center
window.
To Do This
Open the configuration center
window in the Solaris operating
system
a. Log on to the NMS server.
b. Change the current directory to /netnumen/ems/bin in
the installation folder of the NMS server program (for
example, export/home).
c. Run the configcenter.sh file by executing the following
commands to open the NetNumen U31 Unified
Management System – Configuration Center
window.
bash-3.00# cd export/home/netnumen/ems/bin
bash-3.00# ./configcenter.sh
Open the configuration center
window in the Window operating
system
a. Log on to the NMS server.
b. Open the configuration window by using one of the
following methods.
 Click Start > Programs > NetNumen U31 Unified
Management System > U31 Config Center to
1-26 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
To Do This
open the NetNumen U31 Unified Management
System – Configuration Center window.
 Go to \netnumen\ems\bin in the installation folder
of the NMS server program, and double-click 
configcenter.bat to open the NetNumen U31
Unified Management System – Configuration
Center window.
2. In the left navigation tree of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System
- Configuration Center window, choose Configuration Center > OS NTP
Configuration > OS NTP Configuration. The NTP service parameters are
displayed in the right pane, see Figure 1-23.
Figure 1-23 OS NTP Configuration Window
3. Configure the NTP service parameters. Table 1-11 describes the parameters.
Table 1-11 Description of OS NTP Service Parameters
Parameter Description
Enable external clock
source
Select this option and the NMS server synchronizes the time with
another external NTP server.
When this option is selected, the IP address of the main clock
server is required, and the IP address of the standby clock server is
optional.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-27
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter DescriptionEnable the local clock
source
Select this option and the NTP server uses the local clock source.
NTP service  If the NMS server is installed in a Windows operating system,
click Start to start the NTP service provided by the NMS server.
 If the NMS server is installed in a Solaris, Linux, or AIX operating
system, click Start to start the NTP service provided by the
operating system.
Execute Manually execute the time synchronization operation.
4. After the configuration, click Apply.
1.6.5 Configuring NTP Service (C300 v2)
This procedure describes how to configure the NTP service parameters. After the NTP
service is configured, the NE periodically synchronizes the time with the NTP server to
ensure the correct NE time.
ZXA10 C300 V2.0 is used as an example.
Steps
Opening the NTP Configuration window
2. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client
window, right-click the NE, and choose System Management > Time and Clock
Management > NTP Service. The NTP Configuration window is displayed, see 
Figure 1-24.
1-28 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-24 NTP Configuration Window
Specifying the NTP server on the NTP Server tab
4. Click Global to open the NTP Global Configuration dialogue box.
5. Specify the NTP global parameters. Table 1-12 describes the parameters.
Table 1-12 Description of NTP Global Parameters
Parameter Description
NTP Enabling  Enabled: The NE synchronizes time with the NTP server.
 Disabled: The NE uses the local time.
NTP Service
Enabling
Configure whether to enable the NTP service.
NTP Client
Enabling
Configure whether the NE device works as the NTP client.
Configured Stratum Configure the stratum level of the NE device.
Stratum level indicates the distance to the reference clock. Servers are
categorized into different stratum levels based on the distance to the
reference clock.
A reference clock is a stratum-0 device that is assumed to be accurate
and has little or no delay associated with it. The reference clock typically
synchronizes to the correct time (UTC) using GPS transmissions, CDMA
technology or other time signals such as Irig-B, WWV, DCF77, etc.
Stratum-0 servers cannot be used in the network, instead, they are directly
connected to computers which work as stratum-1 servers.
A server that is directly connected to a stratum-0 device is called a
stratum-1 server. A stratum-1 time server acts as a primary network time
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-29
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
standard. A stratum-2 server is connected to the stratum-1 server over a
network path. A stratum-2 server gets its time via NTP packet requests
from a stratum-1 server. A stratum-3 server gets its time via NTP packet
requests from a stratum-2 server, and so on.
Range: 1 - 15
Synchronization
Interval
Time interval that the NE synchronizes time with the NTP server
Current Service
Status
The status of the NTP service
Current Server IP
Address
NTP server IP address
When the NMS server works as the NTP server, this address is the NMS
server IP address and the NTP service on the NMS server needs to be
enabled.
Client IP Address
Type
Select the type of the client IP address.
Client IP Address The NE can be configured with several IP addresses. This parameters is
used to specify the source IP address included in the request packets that
the NE sends to the NTP server.
Authentication
Enable
 Enabled: Enable the function to authenticate the NTP server for
synchronization.
 Disabled: Disable the function to authenticate the NTP server for
synchronization.
6. Click OK to finish the NTP global configuration.
7. Click New to open the NTP Server dialogue box.
8. Specify the NTP server parameters. Table 1-13 describes the parameters.
Table 1-13 Description of NTP Server Parameters
Parameter Description
Priority Priority of the NTP server for time synchronization
Version This parameter should be consistent with the NTP server configuration. It
can be 1, 2, or 3.
Authentication Key
ID
Key ID for the NTP authentication
Server Locking
Status
If one server is locked, the locked server can be used to synchronize time.
If no server is locked, the server which has the highest priority can be used
to synchronize time.
Only one server can be locked.
1-30 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Parameter Description
IP Address Type The IP address type of the NTP server for time synchronization
IP Address The IP address of the NTP server for time synchronization
9. Click OK to finish creating a new NTP server.
Specifying NTP authentication
11. On the NTP Authentication tab, click New to open the NTP Authentication
dialogue box.
12.Specify the parameters according to the requests. Table 1-14 describes the
parameters.
Table 1-14 Description of NTP Authentication Parameters
Parameter Description
Key ID Key ID for the NTP authentication
Key Specify the NTP authentication key.
Length: 1– 16 characters
Trust Status The NTP authentication will not be conducted if the key related to the NTP
server is not in Trust status.
13.Click OK to finish the NTP authentication.
Configuring NTP broadcast and multicast
15.On the NTP Broadcast/Multicast tab, click New to open the NTP Broadcast/
Multicast dialogue box.
16.Specify the parameters according to the request. Table 1-15 describes the
parameters.
Table 1-15 Description of NTP Broadcast or Multicast Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of layer-3 interface for the broadcast or multicast packets
Broadcast
Enabling (As
Client)
Enable this function, and the NE works as the NTP client.
If the NTP client receives the broadcast packets sent by the NTP server,
and the stratum value of the NTP broadcast packets is smaller than the
configured stratum of the NTP client, the NTP server will work as the
reference clock, otherwise the local time is used.
Both the NTP server and NTP client must be in the same network segment.
Multicast Enabling
(As Client)
Enable this function, and the NE works as the NTP client.
If the NTP client receives the multicast packets sent by the NTP server,
and the stratum value of the NTP multicast packets is smaller than the
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-31
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
configured stratum of the NTP client, the NTP server will work as the
reference clock, otherwise the local time is used.
Both the NTP server and NTP client must support the layer-3 multicast
protocol if they are not in the same network segment.
Multicast IP
Address Type (As
Client)
IP address type of the multicast group
Multicast IP
Address (As Client)
IP address of the multicast group
Broadcast
Enabling (As
Server)
Enable this function, and the NE works as the NTP server, and broadcasts
NTP packets to the NTP clients.
If the NTP client receives the broadcast packets, and the stratum value of
the NTP broadcast packets is smaller than the configured stratum of the
NTP client, the NTP server will work as the reference clock, otherwise the
local time is used.
Both the NTP server and NTP client must be in the same network segment.
Multicast Enabling
(As Server)
Enable this function, and the NE works as the NTP server, and sends NTP
multicast packets to the NTP clients.
If the NTP client receives the multicast packets, and the stratum value of
the NTP multicast packets is smaller than the configured stratum of the NTP
client, the NTP server will work as the reference clock, otherwise the local
time is used.
Both the NTP server and NTP client must support the layer-3 multicast
protocol if they are not in the same network segment.
Multicast IP
Address Type (As
Server)
IP address type of the multicast group
Multicast IP
Address (As
Server)
IP address of the multicast group
17.Click OK to finish the NTP broadcast and multicast configuration.
--end--
1.6.6 ConfiguringEnvironment Management
This procedure describes how to configure the proper equipment temperature.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
1-32 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Prerequisite
The Rack window is open.
Steps
1. In the Rack window, right-click the switching and control card and choose System
Management > Environment Management. The Environment Configuration
window is displayed, see Figure 1-25.
Figure 1-25 C300M Environment Configuration Window
For the C300 NE, in the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management
System – Client, right-click the NE, and choose System Management > More
> Environment Configuration. The Environment Configuration window is
displayed, see Figure 1-26.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-33
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-26 C300 Environment Configuration Window
2. Configure the global parameters for environment management.
In the Global Configuration area, configure the global parameters, and then click 
Set Global. For a description of the global parameters, refer to Table 1-16.
Table 1-16 Global Parameter Descriptions for Environment Management
Parameter Description
Env Temperature Alarm
Threshold
When the environment temperature exceeds this threshold, an
alarm is reported.
Fan Speed Ratios of different fan speeds to the highest fan speed.
Fan Speed Control Mode  Fixed Speed: The fan operates at the fixed speed. You can
view the fan speed on the Fan Management tab.
 Auto-Control Based Temperature: Set the temperature for
different fan speeds. The fan speed is adjusted according to
the temperature.
3. Configure the fan management parameters.
a. Click the Fan Management tab, and then view the fan operation status.
b. Select a fan, and then click Modify Fan.
c. In the displayed Modify Fan Management dialog box, configure the fan speed
level and administrative status.
1-34 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
 Note
The fan speed level can be configured only when Fan Speed Control Mode is 
Fixed Speed.
4. View the device power.
Click the Power tab, view the power temperature.
5. View the card temperature.
Click the Card tab, view the card temperature.
--end--
1.6.7 Configuring MAC Table Statistic Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the statistic parameters of the NE dynamic 
MAC table, including the MAC address aging time.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management > 
MAC Table Statistics. The MAC Table Statistics window is displayed, see Figure
1-27.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-35
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-27 MAC Table Statistics Window
3. Configure the MAC address table parameters according to the request. Table 1-17
describes the parameters.
Table 1-17 Description of MAC Table Statistic Parameters
Parameter Description
Current Usage Alarming
Threshold
If the MAC table usage exceeds the specified vale, alarms are
generated and reported.
Usage Monitoring Period Specify the interval to monitor the MAC table usage.
MAC Table Aging Time Specify the MAC able aging time.
4. Click Set.
--end--
1.6.8 Configuring Overheat Protection (C300)
This procedure describes how to configure the overheat protection function. When the
temperature becomes too high due to fan faults, the device automatically enters the
energy-saving and low-consumption mode according to the customized policy. In this
way, the temperatures drops because of power consumption reduction.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
1-36 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Steps
1. In the Topology Management window, right-click the NE, and then choose System
Management > Overheat Protection Configuration. The Overheat Protection
Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 1-28.
Figure 1-28 Overheat Protection Configuration Window
2. Configure the overheat protection parameters. Table 1-18 describes the parameters.
Table 1-18 Description of Overheat Protection Parameters
Parameter Description
System Overheat Protection
Enabling
Configure whether to enable the system overheat protection
function.
Card Critical Temperature
Protection Enabling
Enable this function, and the card automatically stops running
if the card temperature is higher than the built-in predefined
value.
In this way, the service will not be interrupted and the card will
not get faulty.
Overheat Temperature Threshold When the device temperature exceeds this threshold value,
the system overheat protection function is enabled.
Automatic Recovery Time Configure the time for service automatic recovery after the
system overheat protection is enabled.
3. After the configuration, click Modify.
 Note
Select Apply to NEs in Batch to configure the overheat protection function for
multiple NEs in batches.
--end--
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-37
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
1.6.9 Configuring Overheat Protection (C300 v2)
This procedure describes how to configure the overheat protection function. If the
system detects the device is over-heated, the system will shut down the specified
services.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System –
Client window, right-click the NE and choose System Management > Overheat
Protection Configuration. The Overheat Protection Configuration window is
displayed, see Figure 1-29.
Figure 1-29 Overheat Protection Configuration Window
2. Configure the parameters. Table 1-19 describes the overheat protection parameters.
Table 1-19 Description of Overheat Protection Parameters
Parameter Description
Overheat Protection Enabling Configure whether to enable the overheat protection function.
Delay Specify the delaying time between the first step and the second
step.
First Specify the services to be shut down for the first step when the
environment temperature exceeds the specified temperature
Second Step Specify the services to be shut down for the second step after
the delay time when the environment temperature still exceeds
the specified temperature
Card Critical Temperature
Protection Enabling
Enable this function, and the card automatically stops running if
the card temperature is higher than the built-in predefined value.
1-38 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Parameter Description
In this way, the service will not be interrupted and the card will
not get faulty.
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
1.6.10 Configuring Emergency Power Saving
When the AC power fails, the device will use the battery to provide power. If the system
detects the battery voltage is lower than the specified value, the device will automatically
shut down the specified services, and report alarms. This procedure describes how to
configure the emergency power saving function.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management
> Emergency Power Saving Configuration. The Emergency Power Saving
Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 1-30.
Figure 1-30 Emergency Power Saving Configuration Window
3. Configure the parameters. Table 1-20 describes the emergency power saving
parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-39
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 1-20 Description of Emergency Power Saving Parameters
Parameter Description
Emergency Power Saving
Enabling
Configurewhether to enable the emergency power saving
function.
Emergency Power Saving
Delay
If the AC power failure lasts more than the specified delay time,
emergency power saving action will be taken.
Emergency Power Saving
Recover Delay
If the AC power is available again, after this recover delay time,
the emergency power save action will be cancelled.
Battery Voltage The current battery voltage
Battery Voltage Threshold If the device detects the current battery voltage is lower than the
specified threshold value, the emergency power saving function
will be taken.
Emergency Power Saving
Service Type
Specify the types of services to be shut down when the
emergency power saving action is taken.
4. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
1.6.11 Configuring Card Parameters in Batches
This procedure introduces how to configure the card parameters in batches. The
parameters include CPU load threshold, memory usage threshold, and optical module
alarm profile.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management
> Configuring Parameters in Batches. The Configuring Parameters in Batches
window is displayed, see Figure 1-31.
1-40 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-31 Configuring Parameters in Batches Window
3. Configure the card parameters according to the request. Table 1-21 describes the
parameters.
Table 1-21 Description of Card Batch Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
CPU Load Threshold Configure the CPU load threshold value. If the CPU usage
threshold value exceeds the specified value, alarms are
generated and reported.
Memory Usage Threshold Configure the memory usage threshold value. If the memory
usage threshold value exceeds the specified value, alarms are
generated and reported.
Optical Module Alarm Profiles Enter the name of the alarm profiles to be applied to the PON
card.
Card Type Enter the card types for the batch configuration.
Use comma to separate card types.
NE Type Select the NE type and NEs for the batch configuration.
4. After the configuration, click Start to apply the configuration to the cards in batches.
--end--
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-41
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
1.7 Configuring an MAC Address Pool (C300M)
This procedure describes how to configure an MAC address pool. The MAC address
pool is used to assign source MAC addresses to subscribers who access the network
through PPPoA/IPoA method. These source MAC addresses are needed when the
PPPoA/IPoA packets are converted into PPPoE/IPoE packets.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management > 
MAC Pool. The MAC Pool window is displayed, see Figure 1-32.
Figure 1-32 MAC Pool
3. Click New to open the Add MAC Pool dialogue box.
4. Configure the MAC address pool parameter. Table 1-22 describes the parameters.
Table 1-22 Description of MAC Address Pool Parameters
Parameter Description
Starting MAC Address The start address of the MAC pool
MAC Pool Capacity Number of continuous MAC addresses from the starting
MAC address
5. After the configuration, click OK.
1-42 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
--end--
1.8 Configuring 12KC and 16KC Signals
12KC and 16KC are charging pulse signals, corresponding to 12 KHz and 16 KHz
respectively. When the subscriber port is in conversation state, the subscriber line card
sends a charging pulse to the terminal every other charging unit. The terminal's charging
device calculates the connection duration and charges based on the number of received
pulses.
This procedure describes how to configure the pulse voltage, width, and period for 12KC
and 16KC signals.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management
> 12/16KC Configuration. The 12/16KC Config window is displayed, see Figure
1-33.
Figure 1-33 12/16KC Config Window
3. Configure the 12KC or 16KC parameters. Table 1-23 describes the parameters.
Table 1-23 Description of Configuring 12KC and 16KC Signal Parameters
Parameter Description
Width Width of charging pulse signals
Interval Interval for sending charging pulse signals
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-43
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
Voltage Voltage of charging pulse signals
Flag Type of charging pulse signals
4. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
1.9 NE File Management
1.9.1 Managing Software Versions
This procedure describes how to upload, download, synchronize, and swap the NE
software version, upload or download the patches, and show the running software and
patches.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE, and then choose System Management > Software
Management. The Software Management window is displayed, see .
Figure 1-34 Software Management Window
Figure 1-34
The Software Management Window for ZXA10 C300M is as shown in Figure 1-35.
1-44 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-35 Software Management Window (C300M)
2. In the Software Management window, you can perform the following operations.
Option Description
Refresh the software list On the Software Archive tab, lick Refresh.
Upload the card version file
to the specified directory of
the NMS server
a. On the Software Archive tab, click Upload to open the Upload
Software dialogue box.
b. Select the FTP type.
c. Select the files to upload, and the click Start.
The Upload Status column shows whether the files are
uploaded successfully or not.
Download the version files
from the NMS directory to
the NE
a. On the Software Archive tab, click Download to open the 
Download Software dialogue box.
b. Select the FTP type.
c. Click the Select Versions tab, and then select the version files
to download.
d. Click the Specify NE tab, and then select the NEs.
e. Click Start, and the system starts to download the version files
to NEs. The Download Status tab shows whether the files are
downloaded successfully.
Download the version files
from the NMS directory to
the NE at a specified time
a. On the Software Archive tab, click Download to open the 
Download Software dialogue box.
b. Select the FTP type and starting time.
c. Click the Select Versions tab, and then select the version files
to download.
d. Click the Specify NE tab, and then select the NEs.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-45
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Option Description
e. Click Start, and the system starts to download the version files
to NEs at the specified starting time. The Download Status tab
shows whether the files are downloaded successfully.
Update the boot file of the
online card
a. On the Software Archive tab, click Copy Software to Card to
open the Copy Software to Card dialogue box.
b. Select slot and then click Start.
Synchronize the software
versions between the active
control and switching card
and standby control and
switching card
a. On the Software Archive tab, click Synchronize to open the 
Synchronize Software dialogue box.
b. Click Start to synchronize the software versions.
Swap the active and
standby software version
a. On the Software Archive tab, click Swap Software.
b. A confirmationdialogue box appears. Click Yes to swap the
software version.
Delete the software version a. On the Software Archive tab, select the version files, and then
click Delete .
b. A confirmation dialogue box appears. Click Yes to delete the
software version.
Query the information of the
running software versions
On the Running Software tab, click Refresh to display the latest
information of the running software versions.
Upload the patch files from
the NE to the specified
directory of the NMS server
a. On the Patch Archive tab, click Upload to NMS to open the 
Upload Software dialogue box.
b. Select the files to upload, and the click Start.
The Upload Status column shows whether the files are
uploaded successfully or not.
Download the patch files
from the NMS directory to
the NE
a. On the Patch Archive tab, click Download to NE to open the 
Download Software dialogue box.
b. Select the FTP type.
c. Click the Select Versions tab, and then select the version files
to download.
d. Click the Specify NE tab, and then select the NEs.
e. Click Start, and the system starts to download the version files
to NEs. The Download Status tab shows whether the files are
downloaded successfully.
Query the information of the
running patch software
On the Running Patch tab, click Refresh to display the latest
information of the running software versions.
--end--
1.9.2 Backing Up or Restoring the Configuration Files
This procedure describes how to back up and restore the configuration file.
1-46 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the active control and switching card, and then choose NE File
Management > Backup/Restore NE Configuration Data. The Backup/Restore
Configuration File window is displayed, see Figure 1-36.
Figure 1-36 Backup/Restore Configuration File Window
 Note
In the Backup/Restore Configuration File window, the following parameters need
to be configured in NetNumen U31 Unified Management System - Configuration
Center window, see 15.1.4 Configuring the FTP Service.
 FTP Server IP Address
 FTP Server User Name
 FTP Server Password
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-47
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
 FTP Server Root Directory
3. In the Backup/Restore Configuration File window, you can perform the following
operations.
To Do This
Back up the NE configuration files
to the specified directory of the
NMS
a. On the Backup to NMS tab, configure the file backup
directory.
b. Select the files that need to be backed up, and then click 
Start.
The Backup Status column shows whether the
configuration files are backed up successfully.
If Remote Backup is selected, the configuration file is
backed up to the remote FTP server.
Download the NMS backup data
to the NE and restore the NE
configuration data
a. On the Restore to NE tab, and select the NMS directory
where the file to be restored is located.
b. (Optional) Click Select NE to select the NE which the
configuration files will be downloaded to.
c. Click Start to start to download the file to NE.
The Restore Status column shows whether the
configuration files are downloaded successfully.
Back up the NE configuration files
to the specified directory of the
NMS client
a. On the Backup to NMS Client tab, click Browse to select
the file backup directory.
b. Select the files that need to be backed up, and then click 
Start Backup.
The Backup Status column shows that the configuration
files are backed up successfully.
Download the backup data from
NMS client to the NE and restore
the NE configuration data
a. On the Restore to NE from NMS Client tab, Click 
Browse to select the configuration files to be downloaded
to NE.
b. Click Start to start to download the files to NE.
The Restore Status column shows whether the
configuration files are downloaded successfully.
Back up the NE configuration files
to the specified directory of the
NMS in batches
a. Click Batch Backup to NMS to open the Batch Backup
Configuration Data window.
b. Select the NEs on the Specify NE tab, and then click 
Start.
The Backup Status column shows whether the
configuration files are backed up successfully.
Load default configuration Click Load Default Configuration to restore the NE
configuration data to the factory default settings.
--end--
1-48 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
1.9.3 Backing Up an NE File
This procedure describes how to back up an NE file. You can manually back up the
specified NE files, or configure the settings so that the system can automatically back up
the files.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE file server is configured. For more information about the NE file server
configuration, see 1.9.5 Configuring NE File Server.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client
window, right-click the NE, and then choose System Management > NE File
Backup. The NE File Backup window is displayed, see Figure 1-37.
Figure 1-37 NE File Backup Window
2. In the NE File Backup window, you can perform the following operations.
 Note
Before the file backup, the NE file server must be configured first.
To Do This
Configure to automatically backup for a
specified NE file
a. Select an NE file, and then click Modify to open the
Modify Backup Configuration dialogue box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-49
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
b. Select Enable from the Automatic Backup
Enabling drop-down list. Table 1-24 describes the
parameters.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
Back up a specified NE file manually a. Select an NE file, and then click Manual Backup to
open the Manual Backup dialogue box.
b. Click OK to back up the specified file.
Query the backup results Click View Result to open View Backup Result
window, which shows the backup results of the NE.
Table 1-24 Description of NE File Backup Parameters
Parameter Description
Starting Time Starting time of automatic backup
Interval Backup interval
Hold Off Time Backup starting time after the latest modification
Maximum Hold Off Time Backup starting time after the earliest modification
--end--
1.9.4 Updating the ONU Software Immediately
This procedure describes how to manually update the software of a single ONU or a
small batch of ONUs.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The ONUs and their software can be updated.
 The ONU update files are downloaded to the NE.
Context
 Only online ONUs can be updated manually.
 If an ONU does not respond to the manual updating operation, you need to verify
whether that ONU is online.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose System Management > ONU Software
Immediate Updating. The ONU Software Immediate Updating window is
displayed, see Figure 1-38.
1-50 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-38 ONU Software Immediate Updating Window
2. Select the ONU that needs to be updated.
a. Click Add ONU to open the ONU Search window.
b. Select By Location, and configure the searching mode and condition, and then
click .
c. Select the ONU that needs to be updated, and then click Import.
3. Update the ONU software.
a. Select the name of the update software file from the Software File Name drop-
down list and corresponding the software updating operation.
Table 1-25 describes the software update options.
Table 1-25 Description of Software Update Options
Option Description
Download Download the software to the ONU flash.
Active Download the software to the ONU flash, activate the
software, and then restart the ONU.
Commit Download the software to the ONU flash, and thensave it
to flash.
Update and Reboot ONU to Run
New Version
Download the software to ONU flash, active the software,
save the software to flash, and then restart the ONU.
Update but Run New Version at
Back-online
Download the software to ONU flash, activate and save
the software before the ONU restarts.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-51
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
b. (Optional) Select one ONU and click Software Details to open the Image
Information dialogue box, which shows the information of ONU location, ONU
software image, and ONU software update.
c. Click Start Update to update the ONU software.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Delete an ONU that does not
need to be updated immediately
Select one ONU from the ONU list, and then click Delete ONU.
Export the updating result Click Export.
1.9.5 Configuring NE File Server
This procedure introduces how to configure the NE file server, including the file server IP
address, user name, password, and file path. After the configuration, you can manually
back up the files to the specified file server, or the system can automatically back up the
NE files to the specified file server.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client
window, right-click the NE and choose NE File Management > NE File Server
Configuration. The NE File Server Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
1-39.
1-52 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-39 NE File Server Configuration Window
2. Select the NE file server usage, and then click Modify to open the Modify File
Server dialogue box.
3. Configure the parameters according to the request. Table 1-26 describes the
parameters.
Table 1-26 Parameter Description of File Server Modification
Parameter Description
IP Address Configure the IP address of the NE file server.
Protocol Type Configure the protocol type that the file server uses.
User Name Configure the user name used to log on to the server.
User Password Configure the user password used to log on to the server.
File Path Configure the file path to save the NE files.
4. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
1.10 CLI and Log Management
1.10.1 Configuring CLI Global Parameters
This procedure introduces how to configure the CLI global parameters, including
whether to enable the telnet function, user suspend mode, user suspend interval, and
user suspend retries.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-53
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System –
Client window, right-click the NE and choose System Management > CLI Global
Configuration. The CLI Global Configuration window is displayed, see Figure
1-40.
Figure 1-40 CLI Global Configuration Window
2. Configure the CLI global parameters. Table 1-27 describes the parameters.
Table 1-27 Description of CLI Global Parameters
Parameter Description
Telnet Enabled Specify whether to enable the telnet function.
User Suspend Mode Specify the mode to suspend CLI users.
The suspended user or a user from the suspended specified IP address
cannot log on to the device when the user or the IP address is suspended.
 Not Suspend: The user or a user from the specified IP address is not
suspended.
 By IP: When a user enters wrong password more than the maximum
retry times, the user from this CLI IP address will not be permitted to
log on to the device in the period of suspend time.
 By User Name: When a user enters error password more than
maximum retry times, this user will not be permitted to use to log on to
the device in the period of suspend time.
 By IP or User Name: When a user enters wrong password more
than maximum retry times, this user or the user from the specified IP
address will not be permitted to log on to the device in the period of
suspend time. In this mode, a user can use another user name with the
1-54 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Parameter Description
suspended IP address or use another IP address with the suspended
user name to log on to the device.
User Suspend
Interval
The suspend time of user name or IP address
After the suspend time, the user of the specified user name or the user
from the specified IP address can log on to the device again.
User Password
Retries
The maximum retry times that a user can enter the wrong password
The user of the specified user name or the user from the specified IP
address will be suspended if retry times exceeds the maximum retry times.
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
1.10.2 Configuring CLI Users
This procedure describes how to configure the CLI users, including the user name,
password, user rights, and encryption mode. The configured CLI users can log on to the
NE device in CLI mode and configure the NE information.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE, and then choose System Management > CLI User
Configuration. The CLI User Configuration window is displayed, see .
Figure 1-41 CLI User Configuration Window
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-55
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
2. In the CLI User Configuration window, you can perform the following operations.
To Do This
Add a CLI user a. Click New to open the Add CLI User dialogue box.
b. Configure the CLI user parameters. Table 1-28 describes
the parameters.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
Modify a CLI user a. Select one CLI user, and then click Modify to open the 
Modify CLI User dialogue box.
b. Modify the CLI user parameters, and then click OK.
Query the user information Select one CLI user and click View to open the View CLI
User dialogue box, which shows the CLI user information,
including the user access level and maximum logon
sessions.
Add a CLI user in batches a. Click Batch New to open the Add CLI User dialogue
box.
b. Configure the CLI user parameters, and then click OK to
open then Batch Operation – CLI User Configuration
window.
c. Select the NEs, and click Start to add a CLI user to the
NEs in batches.
Modify a CLI user in batches a. Select one CLI user, and then click Batch Modify to
open the Modify CLI User dialogue box.
b. Modify the CLI user parameters, and then click OK to
open then Batch Operation – CLI User Configuration
window.
c. Select the NEs, and click Start to modify the CLI user of
the NEs in batches.
Delete a CLI user in batches a. Select one CLI user, and then click Batch Delete.
b. A confirmation message appears. Click OK to open then
Batch Operation – CLI User Configuration window.
c. Select the NEs, and click Start to delete the CLI user
from the NEs in batches.
Table 1-28 Description of CLI User Parameters
Parameter Description
User Name User name, consisting of 1–16 characters without space
The user name must be unique and case sensitive.
Password Configure the password.
User Access Level  Common User: A common user enters user mode after
login. The common user can only query data, which is used
1-56 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Parameter Description
to locate faults. After entering the enabling password, the
common user can become a root that has all permissions.
 Operator: A operator enters privilege mode after login. The
operator can configure data and provision services, but
cannot add or delete users. After entering the enabling
password, the operator can become a root user that has all
permissions.
 Administrator: An administrator enters privilege mode after
login. The administrator can manage all the common users
and operators, and can perform all the configurations. After
entering the enabling password, the administrator can
become a root user that has all permissions. Root: A root user enters privilege mode after login. The root
user can manage all the common users, operators, and
administrators, and can perform all the configurations.
Maximum Logon Sessions Configure the maximum number of users that can log on to the
device simultaneously.
--end--
1.10.3 Querying Current CLI Session
This procedure introduces how to query the current CLI session information, including
the user login type, user name, priority, idle time, location, and online time.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client
window, right-click the NE and choose System Management > Current CLI
Session. The Current CLI Session window is displayed, see Figure 1-42.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-57
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-42 Current CLI Session Window
Table 1-29 describes the parameters of the current CLI session.
Table 1-29 Description of the Current CLI Session Parameters
Parameter Description
User Logon Type The logon type, including
 Console: The user logs on to the device through the
HyperTerminal method.
 Telnet: The user logs on to the device through the telnet
method.
 SSH: The user logs on to the device through the SSH method.
User Name The name of the user who has logged on to the device
Priority The priority of the logon user
 0-4: Common user
 5-9: Operator
 10-14: Administrator
 15: Root
Already Logged in Host When a user logs on to the CLI terminal from another CLI terminal,
the IP address of the CLI user is displayed, otherwise “Idle” is
displayed.
Idle Time The total time when the logon user is in idle status
Location The IP address of the telnet logon user
Online Time The total time when the logon user is in online status
1-58 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
2. (Optional) Click Refresh to display the latest CLI session information.
--end--
1.10.4 Managing NE Logs
This procedure describes how to manage the NE logs, including enabling NE logs and
querying logs.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE log management function is enabled on the NMS server.
Context
By default, the NE log management function is disabled on the NMS server. The
following procedure introduces how to enable the NE log management function .
1. Go to the NMS server installation path ums-server\procs\ppus\an.ppu\an-commonsh.
pmu\an-commonsh-nelog-emf.par.
2. Delete the suffix .bak from the file zxnm01-nelog-service.xml.bak.
3. Restart the NMS server program.
Steps
1. Configure the Syslog server. For more information, see 1.10.6 Configuring a Syslog
Server.
2. Enable the SNMP log function.
a. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose System Management > More > NE
Log Enabling. The NE Log Configuration window is displayed.
b. Select Enabled from the SNMP Logging Enable drop-down list, and then click 
Apply.
3. Query the NE logs.
a. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose System Management > More > 
NE Log Query. The NE Operation Log Management window is displayed, see 
Figure 1-43.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-59
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-43 NE Operation Log Management Window
b. In the left Log navigation tree, select a log type to query.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Configure the log query
conditions
Click .
Configure the log query
conditions and export the logs
Click .
Configure the log query
conditions and print the logs
Click .
1.10.5 Backing Up NE Logs to NMS Server or Client
This procedure describes how to back up the NE log files to the NMS server or client.
You can select the log files and back up them to the specified folder.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The SNMP logging function is enabled. For more information, see 1.10.4 Managing NE
Logs.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE, and then choose System Management > More > Dump
NE Log. The Upload NE Log window is displayed, see Figure 1-44.
1-60 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-44 Upload NE Log Window
 Note
In the Backup/Restore Configuration File window, the following parameters need
to be configured in NetNumen U31 Unified Management System - Configuration
Center window, see 15.1.4 Configuring the FTP Service.
 FTP Server IP Address
 FTP Server User Name
 FTP Server Password
 FTP Server Root Directory
2. In the Upload NE Log window, you can perform the following operations.
To Do this
Back up the log files to the
backup directory of the NMS
server
a. On the Backup to NMS tab, select the files to be backed up.
b. Click Start to back up the log files to the specified backup
directory, and the Backup Status column shows whether the
backup is successful or not.
Back up the log files to the
root directory of the NMS
server
a. On the Backup to NMS tab, select the files to be backed up.
b. Select Remote Backup and click Start to back up the log files
to the root directory of the NMS server, and the Backup Status
column shows whether the backup is successful or not.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-61
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do this
Back up the log files to the
NMS client
a. On the Backup to NMS Client tab, select the files to be
backed up.
b. Click Browse to specify the directory to back up the log files.
c. Select the files, and then click Start to back up the log files
to the specified directory. The Backup Status column shows
whether the backup is successful or not.
--end--
1.10.6 Configuring a Syslog Server
This procedure describes how to configure a Syslog server so that the NE can report the
command logs, SNMP operation logs, debugging information, and alarm logs through
the Syslog protocol.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE, and then choose System Management > More > 
Syslog Configuration. The SYSLOG Configuration window is displayed, see 
Figure 1-45.
Figure 1-45 SYSLOG Configuration Window
2. In the SYSLOG Configuration window, you can perform the following operations.
1-62 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Option Description
Create a Syslog server a. Click New to open the Add SYSLOG Configuration dialogue
box.
b. Configure the Syslog server parameters. Table 1-30describes
the parameters.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
Modify a Syslog server a. Select a Syslog server, and then click Modify to open the 
Modify SYSLOG Configuration dialogue box.
b. Modify the Syslog server parameters, and then click OK.
Table 1-30 Description of Syslog Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
Server Port UDP port number used by the Syslog protocol
The protocol sets the port number to be 514.
SYSLOG Type Type of the message reported by the NE
 Commands: CLI operation records
 SNMP: SNMP operation records
 Debug: Log messages reported through the Syslog interface
Generally, it is the printed information that indicates the system
status or service status.
 Alarm: Alarm messages
SNMP Operation Type  All: Send the SNMP getting and setting operation logs to the
Syslog server.
 Get: Send the SNMP getting operation logs to the Syslog server.
 Set: Send the SNMP setting operation logs to the Syslog server.
Minimum Alarm Level Lowest severity level of the alarms reported by the NE
The NE reports only the alarms whose severity levels are equal to
or higher than the specified level.
--end--
1.10.7 Configuring Clock Source
This procedure describes how to select a card to configure the clock source.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE, and then choose System Management > More > Clock
Source Management. The Clock Source Management window is displayed, see 
Figure 1-46.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-63
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-46 Clock Source Management Window
2. Click after Card. The Select Card dialogue box is displayed.
3. Select a card to provide the clock source, and than click OK.
4. (Optional) Click Modify to open the Clock Source Management dialogue box.
Modify the priority in the Priority text box and click OK.
--end--
1.10.8 Configuring External Output Clock
This procedure describes how to select a card to configure the clock output, including
the SSM threshold and mode.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE, and then choose System Management > More > 
External Output Clock Configuration. The External Output Clock Configuration
window is displayed, see Figure 1-47.
1-64 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-47 External Output Clock Configuration Window
2. Click beside the Card. The Select Card dialogue box is displayed.
3. Select a card to output the clock source, and then click OK.
4. Configure the SSM Threshold and Mode as required, and then click Modify.
--end--
1.11 Configuring UAPS Protection
The NE supports the UAPS function. The system periodically checks the working status
of the uplink port. When the system detects that the working port is disconnected or the
link quality is deteriorated to a useless degree, it switches the services to the standby
port automatically and without interrupting the services.
This procedure describes how to configure UAPS function.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. Open the UAPS Configuration window, see Figure 1-48.
To Do This
Open the UAPS Configuration
window of PON NE
a. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified
Management System-Client window, right-click the
NE and then choose System Management > More
> Port UAPS Protection. The UAPS Configuration
window is displayed.
Open the UAPS Configuration
window of AG NE
a. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified
Management System-Client window, right-click the
NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the
Rack window.
b. Right-click the uplink port to open the Port Manager
window.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-65
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
c. Click Advanced > Port UAPS Protection. The UAPS
Configuration window is displayed.
Figure 1-48 UAPS Configuration Window
2. Create a UAPS group.
a. Click New to open the Add UAPS Configuration dialogue box.
b. Set the UAPS group ID, and then click OK.
3. Configure the primary and secondary ports of the UAPS group.
a. In the UAPS Configuration window, select the UAPS group, and then click Port
Configuration to open the UAPS Port Configuration dialogue box.
b. In the Primary Port List area, select the UAPS primary port from the Port list,
and then click .
c. In the Secondary Port List area, select the UAPS secondary port from the Port
list, and then click .
d. After the configuration, click OK.
4. Configure the attributes of the UAPS protection group.
a. In the UAPS Configuration window, select the UAPS group, and then click 
Modify to open the Modify UAPS Configuration dialogue box.
b. Configure the UAPS protection group parameters. Table 1-31 describes the
UAPS configuration parameters.
1-66 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Table 1-31 UAPS Configuration Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description
Swap Mode The NE supports the following swap mode.
 Common: If one primary port is down, services are
switched to the secondary ports.
 Trunk: Only when all the primary ports are down will
services be switched to the secondary ports.
Secondary Port Lighting
Shutdown
Configure whether to enable the function to shut down the
secondary port lighting.
Automatic Recovery Enabling When the fault of the primary port is removed, the system
automatically switches the services to the primary port.
Protection Time Configure the protection time of UAPS.
If the protection switching is executed once, no more
switching operations will be conducted during the specified
protection time.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
5. (Optional) To switch over the primary port to the secondary port of a UAPS group,
select the group and then click Swap.
--end--
1.12 Configuring MAC Address Binding or Filtering
This procedure describes how to bind or filter the MAC address for the specified port.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client
window, right-click the NE and choose System Management > MAC Bind and
Filter. The MAC Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 1-49.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-67
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-49 MAC Configuration Window
2. Select rack, shelf, slot, port and ONU.
3. In the MAC Configuration window, you can perform the following operations.
To Do This
Bind one MAC address a. On the Bind MAC tab, click New to open the Add MAC Binding
dialogue box.
b. Configure the MAC address to bind, and then click OK.
Filter one MAC address a. On the Filter MAC tab, click New to open the Add MAC Filter
dialogue box.
b. Configure the MAC address to be filtered, and then click OK.
--end--
1.13 Configuring VMAC
This procedure describes how to configure the VMAC function. With this function
enabled, the system can control the source MAC address of the uplink Ethernet
frames by replacing the source MAC address with the system-allocated MAC address.
Operators can determine the location and source of a subscriber port (device number,
slot number, and port number) with the VMAC function.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
1-68 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click a DSL card, and choose VMAC Configuration. The VMAC
Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 1-50.
Figure 1-50 VMAC Configuration Window
3. Enable the DHCP MAC function, and set VMAC Key and VMAC Format.
For a description of some parameters for configuring the VMAC function, refer to 
Table 1-32.
Table 1-32 Parameter Descriptions for Configuring the VMAC Function
Parameter Description
DHCP VMAC Enabling Enables or disables the DHCP VMAC translation function.
The DHCP VMAC function is enabled by default.
VMAC Key The system automatically generates a VMAC address
according to this value and some specific rules.
VMAC Format Configures the format of a VMAC address.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-69
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
User-defined Customizes the format of a VMAC address.
4. Configure VMAC translation based on the PVC or VLAN as required.
To ... Do ...
Configure the VMAC translation
based on the PVC
a. On the Based on PVC tab, set Rack, Shelf, Card, Port,
and PVC.
b. Select the PVC for which the DHCP VMAC function is to
be enabled, and click the Modify button.
c. Select Enabled from the VMAC Enabling drop-down
list, and click OK.
Configure the VMAC translation
based on the VLAN
a. On the Based on VLAN tab, click the New button. The 
Add VMAC Enabling based on VLAN dialogue box is
displayed.
b. In the VLAN ID text box, enter the VLAN for which the
VMAC translation is to be performed, and click OK.
5. Click the Set button.
--end--
1.14 Configuring DHCP VMAC
This procedure describes how to configure the DHCP VMAC function basedon a port
and VLAN. This function replaces the uplink DHCP source MAC address of a specified
port with a VMAC address.
Prerequisite
 The global VMAC function is enabled.
 The VMAC function based on the specified port is enabled.
For the VMAC configuration, refer to 1.13 Configuring VMAC
Steps
1. In the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System - Client window, double-
click the NE from the NE tree in the left pane. The Rack window is displayed. Right-
click a DSL card, and select DHCP VMAC Configuration. The DHCP VMAC
Configuration window is displayed.
2. Click the New button. The Add dialogue box is displayed, see Figure 1-51.
1-70 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Figure 1-51 Add Dialog Box
3. Enter a port number, PVC and VLAN ID, and click OK.
--end--
1.15 Configuring Parameters to Automatically Save
Configuration to Flash
This procedure introduces how to configure the parameters to automatically save the
configuration data to flash. You can configure to save the configuration data every day,
regularly, or after the configuration is made.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose Open Rack Diagram to open the Rack
window.
2. Right-click the control and switching card, and then choose System Management
> Automatic Saving Configuration Data. The Auto-saving Flash Configuration
window is displayed, see Figure 1-52.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-71
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 1-52 Auto-saving Flash Configuration Window
3. Specify the auto-saving mode and related parameters. Table 1-33 describes the
parameters to automatically save the configuration data.
Table 1-33 Description of Parameters to Automatically Save Configuration Data
Parameter Description
Automatic Saving Mode  Disabled: Disable the function to automatically save the
configuration data.
 Daily: Save the configuration data everyday.
 Once: Save the configuration data only one time.
 Configuration Changed: Save the configuration data after the
configuration is made.
Daily Time When the Automatic Saving Mode is set to Daily, specify the
time to automatically save the configuration data to flash.
Once Time When the Automatic Saving Mode is set to Once, specify the
starting time and data to automatically save the configuration
data to flash.
Hold Off Time When the Automatic Saving Mode is set to Configuration
Changed, specify the time to automatically save the
configuration data to flash after the configuration is made.
4. After the configuration, click Apply.
5. (Optional) Apply the configuration to automatically save the data to NEs in batches,
perform the following operations.
a. After the configuration, click Batch Config to open the Batch Operation – Auto-
saving Flash Batch Configuration window.
b. Specify the NEs, and start time according to the request.
1-72 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
c. Click Start and the system automatically applies the configuration to the NEs in
batches at the specified start time.
--end--
1.16 Security Management
1.16.1 Configuring an SSH Server
This procedure introduces how to configure an SSH server, including the SSH version
and authentication type.
SSH encrypts the packets to be transmitted, and improves the transmission speed.
Both user name and password are encrypted when the SSH client and SSH server
communicate, which can effectively prevent the password interception.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System -
Client window, right-click the NE and choose System Management > Security
Management > SSH Server Configuration. The SSH Server window is displayed,
see Figure 1-53.
Figure 1-53 SSH Server Window
2. Configure the SSH server parameters. Table 1-34 describes the parameters.
Table 1-34 SSH Server Parameter Description
Parameter Description
SSH Enabling  Disabled: Disable the SSH server function.
 Enabled: Enable the SSH server function.
SSH Only If the SSH server function is enabled, after this function is enabled,
users cannot access the NE by using the telnet method.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-73
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
Generate Key When SSH Version is set to be V1, this parameter is available.
SSH Version Configure the version of the SSH service.
Authentication Type Configure the authentication type for the SSH service, including 
CHAP and PAP.
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
1.16.2 Configuring SPAN Function
This procedure introduces how to configure the SPAN function, which is used to copy
the ACL traffic data to the specified destination port (analyzing port) for fault diagnosis
and network traffic analysis.
ZXA10 C300 is used for example.
Steps
1. In the topology view of the NetNumen U31 Unified Management System – Client
window, right-click the NE and choose System Management > More > SPAN
Configuration. The SPAN Configuration window is displayed, see Figure 1-54.
Figure 1-54 SPAN Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add SPAN dialogue box.
3. Configure the parameters according to the request. describes the parameters.
1-74 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
1 System Management
Table 1-35 Description of SPAN Parameters
Parameter Description
Session ID Configure the ID of the traffic session between the analyzed port and
analyzing port.
SPAN Type  SPAN: Select this option to copy the data between the ports in the local
device. The traffic data of the source port (analyzed port) is copied and
sent to the analyzing equipment connected to the destination port (
analyzing port).
On the fault site, the analyzed traffic data is copied to the port that is not
used temporarily, and a computer is used to capture and analyze data.
Because this operation must be manually carried out, and the analyzing
port must be the electrical port, it is very inconvenient to capture and
analyze data.
 RSPAN: When both the analyzed device and analyzing device are in a
layer-2 network, remote SPAN is selected to copy the data between the
different devices.
The VLAN information is added to the header of the analyzed packets,
and the analyzed traffic data is switched to the analyzing equipment
connected to the destination port of the analyzing device in the layer-2
network.
Because the traffic data is flooded in the layer-2 network, and the
corresponding VLAN must be configured in the whole network, it is not
convenient to capture and analyze data.
 ERSPAN: When both the analyzed device and analyzing device are in
a layer-3 network, encapsulated remote SPAN is selected to copy the
data between the different devices.
The analyzed data is encapsulated, and the corresponding layer-3
router is configured. The analyzed traffic data is switched and forwarded
to the analyzing equipment connected to the destination port of the
analyzing device in the layer-3 network.
Source Port Configure the port to be analyzed, including the traffic direction.
Destination Port Configure the port to analyze the traffic.
VLAN ID Configure the VLAN ID to be added to the analyzed traffic data.
CoS Configure the CoS to be added to the analyzed traffic data.
TPID Configure the TPID to be added to the analyzed traffic data.
Destination
Address Type
Configure the IP address type of the analyzing device.
Destination IP
Address
Configure the IP address of the analyzing device.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 1-75
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
Source Address
Type
Configure the IP address type of the device to be analyzed.
Source IP Address Configure the IP address of the device to be analyzed.
TTL Configure the TTL value of the traffic data to be analyzed.
DSCP Configurethe DSCP of the traffic data to be analyzed.
4. After the configuration, cClick OK.
--end--
1-76 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
Chapter 2
Protocol and Service
Configuration
Table of Contents
Opening the NE Protocol Manager Window..................................................................2-1
Configuring Service Ports.............................................................................................. 2-5
VLAN Management........................................................................................................2-8
Multicast Management................................................................................................. 2-46
IGMP Management...................................................................................................... 2-55
MLD Multicast Management........................................................................................ 2-75
MLD Management........................................................................................................2-83
QoS Management...................................................................................................... 2-101
DHCP Snooping.........................................................................................................2-142
Port Location.............................................................................................................. 2-156
L2 Protocol Management...........................................................................................2-182
L3 Protocol Management...........................................................................................2-218
Configuring OSPF (C300)..........................................................................................2-288
NE Security Configuration......................................................................................... 2-289
2.1 Opening the NE Protocol Manager Window
The NE Protocol Manager window can be used to configure and manage the NE
broadband and narrowband services in a centralized method. It lists the related
functions to configure layer-2 protocols and layer-3 services. These functions include
VLAN, multicast, QoS, DHCP snooping, static route, layer-3 interface, DHCP L3 replay,
and others. The NE protocol Manager window also provides the functions related to
VoIP configurations. With the help of the NE Protocol Manager widow, the maintenance
personnel can configure and manage the NMS services conveniently.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-1
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the topology view of NetNumen U31 Unified Management System-Client
window, right-click the NE and then choose NE Protocol Manager to open the NE
Protocol Manager window.
The configuration functions in the NE Protocol Manager window vary with the NE.
The NE Protocol Manager window for ZXA10 C300 is as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 ZXA10 C300 NE Protocol Manager Window
The NE Protocol Manager window for ZXA10 C300 v2 is as shown in Figure 2-2.
2-2 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-2 ZXA10 C300 v2 NE Protocol Manager Window
The NE Protocol Manager window for ZXA10 C300M is as shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 ZXA10 C300M NE Protocol Manager Window
The NE Protocol Manager window for ZXA10 C300M v4 is as shown in Figure 2-4.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-3
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-4 ZXA10 C300M v4 NE Protocol Manager Window
2. (Optional) Locate the configuration function nodes.
In the NE Protocol Manager window, the maintenance personnel can search
and locate the configuration function nodes quickly, and meanwhile the users can
customize the configuration function nodes to display in the window, see Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Description of NE Protocol Manager Window Buttons
Button Description
Use key words to search the configuration nodes.
Enter the key word in the text box, such as VLAN, and then click
 to search for the configuration nodes that contain the key word 
VLAN.
Expand all the nodes.
Collapse all the nodes.
To customize the configuration function nodes to display in the
navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, perform the
following operations.
a. Click to open the Option dialogue box,
b. Select Customize Operation Tree and then select the items
in the right pane. All the selected items are displayed in the
navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window.
3. Configure the functions.
2-4 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click a node,
and then configure the corresponding parameters in the right pane.
--end--
2.2 Configuring Service Ports
This procedure describes how to configure service ports. The system adds the CVLAN
or CVLAN + SVLAN to user-side packets according to different rules when these
packets are forwarded.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The Smartgroup is configured. For more information about configuring a Smartgroup,
see 2.11.3.2 Configuring an LACP Aggregation Group.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, double-click Service
Port. The service port parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 Service Port Configuration Window
2. Configure the service port parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-5
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
Configure the port-based service
port
a. On the Based on Port tab, select the rack, shelf, slot,
port, and ONU.
b. Click New to open the Add Service Port dialogue box.
c. In the left Service Port Modes navigation tree, select a
service port mode.
d. In the right pane, configure the service port
parameters. Table 2-2 describes the service port
parameters.
e. After the configuration, click OK.
Configure the Smartgroup-based
service port
a. On the Based on SmartGroup tab, click New to open
the Add Service Port dialogue box.
b. In the left Service Port Modes navigation tree, select a
service port mode.
c. In the right pane, configure the service port
parameters. Table 2-2 describes the service port
parameters.
d. After the configuration, click OK.
Table 2-2 Description of Service Port Parameters
Parameter Description
VPort Virtual port of the specified ONU
By default, one virtual port corresponds to one GEM port.
Service Port Service port of the specified ONU
You can select different service port to configure the user-side
broadband services, the TLS, VLAN QinQ and VLAN translation.
Description Description of the service mode
Administrative Status Configure whether to enable the administrative status of the
specified service port.
User EtherType Configure he user Ethernet type.
 PPPoE: User Ethernet type is PPPoE
 IPoE: User Ethernet type is IPoE.
 UserDefined: Configure the user Ethernet type in the User
Defined EtherType text box.
User Defined EtherType Configure the user side of Ethernet packet type.
Filter Frames by EtherType Configure whether to filter the frames by Ethernet type.
User CoS Configure the CoS priority of the user-side packets.
User VLAN Configure the VLAN ID contained in user-side tagged packets.
2-6 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Starting VID Configure the starting VLAN ID contained in user-side tagged
packets.
Ending VID Configure the ending VLAN ID contained in user-side tagged
packets.
User VID Configure the VLAN ID contained in user-side tagged packets.
User CoS Configure the CoS priority contained in user-side tagged packets.
User DSCP Configure DSCP ID contained in the user-side VLAN tagged
packets.
C-VID Configure the inner VLAN ID of the network-side double-tagged
packets.
S-VID Configurethe outer VLAN ID of the network-side double-tagged
packets.
C-Tag CoS Configure the inner CoS priority of the network-side double-
tagged packets.
S-Tag CoS Configure the outer CoS priority of the network-side double-
tagged packets.
TLS S-VID Configure TLS S-VID added to the user-side untagged packets
when packets are forwarded.
Ingress Traffic Profile Configure the traffic profile to control the ingress traffic of the
service port.
Egress Traffic Profile Configure the traffic profile to control the egress traffic of the
service port.
VLAN Translation Mode When the VLAN translation mode is set to be 1:1, packets are
exchanged in accordance with the VLAN IDs, rather than the
MAC + VLAN forwarding mechanism.
--end--
Related Task
To Do This
Modify a service port
configuration
1. Select one service port configuration, and then click Modify to
open the Modify Service Port dialogue box.
2. Modify the parameters according to the request, and then click 
OK.
Export a service port
configuration as a profile,
1. Select one service port configuration, choose Profile > Export
to profile. The Export to Profile dialogue box is displayed.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-7
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
2. Specify the profile name and then click OK.
Import a service port
configuration profile
1. Choose Profile > Import from profile. The Select Profile for
Port dialogue box is displayed.
2. Select the profile and then click Next.
3. (Optional) Modify the profile to import.
a. Click Modify to open the Modify Profile dialogue box.
b. Modify the parameters, and then click OK.
4. Click Apply to import the profile.
2.3 VLAN Management
2.3.1 Configuring a Static VLAN (C300)
This procedure describes how to configure a static VLAN, which is used to logically
divide equipment ports into network segments to control communication between ports.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
Static VLAN. The static VLAN parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-6.
2-8 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-6 Static VLAN Configuration Window
2. Create a static VLAN.
a. Click Add to open the Add Static VLAN Properties dialogue box.
b. Configure the static VLAN property parameters. Table 2-3 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-3 Description of Static VLAN Parameters
Parameter Description
Transparent Enabling If the transparent transmission function is enabled, the system
forwards the packets according to VLAN ID other than MAC
addresses.
It is recommended to use the default value Disabled.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Modify a VLAN 1. Select a VLAN, and then click Modify to open the Modify Static VLAN
Properties dialogue box.
2. Modify the VLAN parameters, and then click OK.
Query the binding
information
Select one VLAN, and then choose Advanced > Port Binding Info to
open the Port Binding Info of VLAN dialogue box. This dialogue box
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-9
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
shows all the ports that are added to the VLAN in tagged or untagged
mode.
Modify VLAN TPID 1. Select a VLAN and then choose Advanced > VLAN TPID to open the 
Modify VLAN TPID Properties dialogue box.
2. Modify the TPID parameter, and then click OK.
2.3.2 Configuring Port VLAN
This procedure describes how to add the uplink ports and service ports to a service
VLAN.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > Port
VLAN. The port VLAN parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 Port VLAN Configuration Window
2. Add an uplink port to a VLAN.
a. In the NE Protocol Manager window, select the rack, shelf, and slot number of
the uplink card.
2-10 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
b. Select a port, and then click Modify to open the Port VLAN Configuration
dialogue box.
c. Configure the uplink port parameters. Table 2-4 describes the parameters. After
the configuration, click Set.
Table 2-4 Description of Uplink Port VLAN Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN Mode  Hybrid: Both untagged and tagged packets can be forwarded.
 Trunk: Only tagged packets can be forwarded.
Port PVID Default VLAN ID of the port
Port TPID Enable Configure whether to enable the TPID function for the selected port,
so that the packets sent to the public network are labelled with the
specified TPID value, which makes it possible to communicate with
other manufacturers' devices.
Outer TPID TPID occupies one bit of the VLAN tag information in the 802.1q
frames, and TPID is generally set to be 0x8100 in IEEE 802.1Q
protocol.
Different manufacturer may specify the outer TPID value to different
value.
d. Select the port, and then click VLAN Binding to open the VLAN Binding
Configuration dialogue box.
e. Select the VLAN binding type, enter the VLAN ID, and then click Bind.Table 2-5
describes the parameters.
Table 2-5 Description of VLAN Binding Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN Type Select Tagged VLAN for the uplink port. The upstream packets
are added with the VLAN information and sent to the upper-layer
devices.
3. Add service ports to a VLAN.
a. In the NE Protocol Manager window, select the rack, shelf, and slot number of
the subscriber card.
b. Select a port, and then click Modify to open the Port VLAN Configuration
dialogue box.
c. Configure the service port parameters. Table 2-6 describes the parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-11
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 2-6 Description of Service Port VLAN Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN Mode  Hybrid: Both untagged and tagged packets can be forwarded.
 Trunk: Only tagged packets can be forwarded.
 Access: Only untagged packets can be forwarded.
TLS Status Set a user port to be a TLS port or a non-TLS port.
 When a non-TLS port receives an untagged/priority-tagged
packet, it forward the packet to the upper-layer devices after
tagging the packet with a corresponding PVID.
When a non-TLS port receives a tagged packet whose VLAN
is one of the VLANS that the port has been added to, it
directly forwards the tagged packet to the upper-layer devices,
otherwise, the tagged packet is discarded.
 When a TLS port receives an untagged/priority-tagged packet,
or a tagged packet whose VLAN is not one of the VLANs that the
port has been added to, it forwards the packet to the upper-layer
device after tagging the packet with a TLS VLAN ID.
When a TLS port receives a tagged packet whose VLAN is one
of the VLANs that the port has been added to, it directly forwards
the tagged packet to the upper-layer devices.
When the VLAN mode is set to be Access, the TLS Status
parameter cannot be configured.
TLS VLAN ID TLS outer VLAN ID
It is effective only when TLS Status is set to be Enabled.
Port PVID Default outer VLAN ID of a port
When the VLAN mode is set to be Access, the port is added to the
VLAN in untagged mode.
Port CPVID Default inner VLAN ID of a port
Port TPID Enable Configure whether to enable the TPID function for the selected port,
so that the packets sent to the public network are labelled with the
specified TPID value, which makes it possible to communicate with
other manufacturers' devices.
Outer TPID TPID occupies one bit of the VLAN tag information in the 802.1q
frames, and TPID is generally set to be 0x8100 in IEEE 802.1Q
protocol.
Different manufacturer may specify the outer TPID value to different
value.
2-12 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
d. (Optional) Select the port, and then click VLAN Binding to open the VLAN
BindingConfiguration dialogue box, select the VLAN binding type, enter the
VLAN ID, and then click Bind.
 Note
When the VLAN mode is set to be Access, you do not need to configure the
VLAN binding parameters.
--end--
2.3.3 Configuring SmartGroup Port VLAN (C300 v2)
This procedure describes how to add a SmartGroup port to a service VLAN. Smartgroup
port refers to the ports aggregated based on the LACP protocol, the Smartgroup port
and Ethernet port share the same VLAN properties.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The Smartgroup is configured. For more information about configuring a Smartgroup,
see 2.11.3.2 Configuring an LACP Aggregation Group.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN
> SmartGroup Port VLAN. The port VLAN parameters of the SmartGroup are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-8.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-13
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-8 SmartGroup Port VLAN Configuration Window
2. Select a Smartgroup port, and then click Modify to open the Port VLAN
Configuration dialogue box.
3. Configure the SmartGroup port parameters, and then click Set. Table 2-7 describes
the parameters.
Table 2-7 Description of Port VLAN Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN Mode  Hybrid: Both the untagged and tagged packets can be
forwarded.
 Trunk: Only the tagged packets can be forwarded.
TLS Status Set a user port to be a TLS port or a non-TLS port.
 When a non-TLS port receives an untagged/priority-tagged
packet, it forward the packet to the upper-layer devices after
tagging the packet with a corresponding PVID.
When a non-TLS port receives a tagged packet whose VLAN
is one of the VLANS that the port has been added to, it
directly forwards the tagged packet to the upper-layer devices,
otherwise, the tagged packet is discarded.
 When a TLS port receives an untagged/priority-tagged packet,
or a tagged packet whose VLAN is not one of the VLANs
that the port has been added to, it forwards the packet to the
upper-layer device after tagging the packet with a TLS VLAN
ID.
2-14 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
When a TLS port receives a tagged packet whose VLAN is
one of the VLANs that the port has been added to, it directly
forwards the tagged packet to the upper-layer devices.
It is recommended to use the default value Disabled.
TLS VLAN ID TLS outer VLAN ID
It is effective only when TLS Status is set to be Enabled.
Port PVID Default outer VLAN ID of a port
Outer TPID TPID occupies one bit of the VLAN tag information in the 802.1q
frames, and TPID is generally set to be 0x8100 in IEEE 802.1Q
protocol.
Different manufacturer may specify the outer TPID value to
different value.
4. Select the Smartgroup port again, and then clickVLAN Binding to open The VLAN
Binding Configuration dialogue box.
5. Select the VLAN binding type, and then enter the VLAN ID. Table 2-8 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-8 Description of VLAN Binding Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN Type Select Tagged VLAN for the SmartGroup port. The upstream packets
are added with the VLAN information and sent to the upper-layer
devices.
6. After the configuration, click Bind.
--end--
2.3.4 Configuring SmartGroup Port VLAN (C300)
This procedure describes how to add a SmartGroup port to a service VLAN. Smartgroup
port refers to the ports aggregated based on the LACP protocol, the Smartgroup port
and Ethernet port share the same VLAN properties.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The Smartgroup is configured. For more information about configuring a Smartgroup,
see 2.11.3.2 Configuring an LACP Aggregation Group.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-15
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN
> SmartGroup Port VLAN. The port VLAN parameters of the SmartGroup are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 SmartGroup Port VLAN Configuration Window
2. Select a port, and then click Modify to open the Port VLAN Configuration dialogue
box.
3. Configure the SmartGroup port parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-9 describes
the port parameters.
Table 2-9 Description of Smartgroup Port VLAN Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN Mode  Hybrid: Both the untagged and tagged packets can be
forwarded.
 Trunk: Only the tagged packets can be forwarded.
Port PVID Default VLAN ID of the port
Port TPID Enable Configure whether to enable the TPID function for the selected
port, so that the packets sent to the public network are labelled
with the specified TPID value, which makes it possible to
communicate with other manufacturers' devices.
Outer TPID TPID occupies one bit of the VLAN tag information in the 802.1q
frames, and TPID is generally set to be 0x8100 in IEEE 802.1Q
protocol.
2-16 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Different manufacturer may specify the outer TPID value to
different value.
4. Select the port, and then click VLAN Binding to open the VLAN Binding
Configuration dialogue box.
5. Select the VLAN binding type, enter the VLAN ID. Table 2-10 describes the VLAN
binding parameters.
Table 2-10 Description of VLAN Binding Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN Type Select Tagged VLAN for the SmartGroup port. The upstream packets
are added with the VLAN information and sent to the upper-layer
devices.
6. After the configuration, click Bind.
--end--
2.3.5 Configuring VLAN QinQ
This procedure describes how to configure VLAN QinQ. The VLAN QinQ function
is used to add different outer VLAN tags to the upstream tagged packets for service
identification.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > More
> VLAN QinQ. The VLAN QinQ parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure
2-10.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-17
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-10 VLAN QinQ Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, and slot.
3. Configure the QinQ rule.
To Do This
Configure a QinQ rule based on
one CVLAN
a. Click New to open the Port VLAN QinQ Configuration
Property dialogue box.
b. Select the service port number and VLAN ID, and then
configure the SVLAN ID.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
Configure a QinQ rule based a
CVLAN segment
Before the operation, make sure that the NE supports the
QinQ configuration based on the CVLAN segment.
a. Click Batch Add to open the Batch Create QinQ
dialogue box.
b. Select the service port number and VLAN segment, and
then configure the SVLAN ID.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.3.6 Configuring Reserved VLAN (C300M)
A reserved VLAN refers to the VLAN used for internal exchange. It cannot be configured
to a service VLAN.
The upstream and downstream reserved VoIP VLAN is used to process the internal
voice data stream. The GPON reserved VLAN is used for the communication between
2-18 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
the GPON uplink card and control and switching card. The reserved VLAN ID can be
modified as required.
This procedure describes how to configure a reserved VLAN for the specified service
type.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
Reserved VLAN. The reserved VLAN parameters are displayed on the right, see 
Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 Reserved VLAN Configuration Window
2. Select a service type and then click Modify to open the Modify Reserved VLAN
dialogue box.
3. Configure the VLANID, and then click OK.
--end--
2.3.7 Configuring VLAN Mapping (C300M)
This procedure describes how to add different CVLAN and SVLAN tags to the service
packets according to the different protocol types.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-19
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > VLAN
Mapping. The VLAN mapping parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure
2-12.
Figure 2-12 VLAN Mapping Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, and slot.
3. Click New to open the Add VLAN Mapping dialogue box.
4. Select the port number, PVC , and Ethernet protocol type, configure the SVLAN ID
and CVLAN ID, and then click OK.
--end--
2.3.8 Configuring VLAN Translation Function
This procedure describes how to configure the VLAN translation function. This function
is used to add specified inner and outer VLAN tags to the subscriber service packets
according to the system-defined translation rules.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
2-20 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The subscriber port has been added to the specified VLAN.
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > VLAN Translation. The VLAN translation parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 VLAN Translation Configuration Window
2. Configure the VLAN translation rule.
To Do This
Configure one VLAN translation
rule
a. Select the rack, shelf, and slot for the DSL card.
Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU for the PON
card.
b. Click New to open the Port VLAN Translation
Configuration Property dialogue box.
c. Specify the port, VLAN ID, CVLAN ID, and SVLAN ID, and
then click OK.
Configure the VLAN translation
rule in batches
a. Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU for the PON
card.
b. Click Batch New to open the Batch Add Translation
dialogue box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-21
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
c. Specify the port, VLAN IDs, CVLAN IDs, and SVLAN IDs,
and then click OK.
--end--
2.3.9 Configuring VLAN CoS Mapping
The VLAN CoS mapping function is used to add specified inner and outer VLAN tags
to the subscriber service packets according to the service packet priority and system-
defined translation rules.
This procedure describes how to configure the VLAN CoS mapping rule.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The VLAN CoS mapping function is enabled.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
VLAN CoS Mapping. The parameters to configure the VLAN CoS mapping rules are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 VLAN CoS Mapping Configuration Window
2-22 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
2. Select the rack, shelf, and slot.
3. Click New to open the Adding VLAN CoS Mapping dialogue box.
4. Select the user port, and then specify the user CoS, CVLAN ID and SVLAN ID, and
then click OK.
--end--
2.3.10 Configuring Global VLAN TPID
This procedure describes how to configure the global VLAN TPID. The TPID of the static
VLAN should be included within the global TPID range.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > Global TPID Configuration. The VLAN TPID parameters are displayed on
the right, see Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Global VLAN TPID Configuration Window
2. Configure the inner VLAN TPID and outer VLAN TPID. The outer VLAN TPID must
be 0X8100.
3. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-23
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
2.3.11 Configuring 1:1 VLAN (C300)
This procedure describes how to configure the 1:1 VLAN function. 1:1 VLAN is a
dedicated channel for a service port and uplink port. After the 1:1 VLAN function is
configured, packets are exchanged according to the VLAN ID other than MAC + VLAN
forwarding mechanism.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The PON service is configured.
Steps
1. Configure the user service port.
a. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Service
Port. The service port configuration parameters are displayed on the right.
b. On the Based on Port tab, select the rack, shelf, card, port, and ONU.
c. Click New to open the Add Service Port dialogue box.
d. In the Service Port Modes navigation tree, choose Tagged.
e. In the right pane, configure the user VID, C-VID, and S-VID.
f. Select VLAN 1:1 from the VLAN Translation Mode drop-down list, and select 
Enabled from the VLAN Xconnect Enabling drop-down list.
For more information about the description of service port configuration
parameters, see 2.2 Configuring Service Ports.
g. After the configuration, click OK.
2. Configure the uplink port VLAN.
 Note
The VLAN to be bound with the port should be consistent with the S-VID configured
in the Add Service Port dialogue box.
For more information about configuring the uplink port VLAN, see2.3.2 Configuring
Port VLAN.
3. Configure the 1:1 VLAN function.
a. In the left navigation tree in the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > 1:1 VLAN. The 1:1 VLAN configuration parameters are displayed in the
right pane, see Figure 2-16.
2-24 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-16 1:1 VLAN Configuration Window
b. Click New to open the 1:1 VLAN Configuration dialogue box, see Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 1:1 VLAN Configuration Dialogue Box
c. Configure the VLAN configuration parameters. Table 2-11 describes the 1:1 VLAN
Parameters.
Table 2-11 1:1 VLAN Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description
SVLAN The packets are exchanged according to the SVLAN ID.
CVLAN The packets are exchanged according to the CVLAN +
SVLAN double tags.
VLAN Based Forwarding
Mode
The forwarding mode includes the following options.
 Between Uplink Port and User Port
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-25
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
 Between User Port and User Port
 Note
The SVLAN ID and CVLAN ID should be consistent with the C-VID and S-VID
configured in the Add Service Port dialogue box.
d. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.3.12 Configuring 1:1 VLAN (C300 v2)
This procedure describes how to configure the 1:1 VLAN function. 1:1 VLAN is a
dedicated channel for a service port and uplink port. After the 1:1 VLAN function is
configured, packets are exchanged according to the VLAN ID other than MAC + VLAN
forwarding mechanism.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The PON service is configured.
Steps
Configuring the service port rule
2. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Service
Port. The service port configuration parameters are displayed on the right.
3. On the Based on Port tab, select rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU.
4. Click New to open the Add Service Port dialogue box.
5. In the Service Port Modes navigation tree, choose Tagged.
6. In the right pane, configure the user VLAN, C-VID, and S-VID.
2.2 Configuring Service Ports describes the parameters.
Configuring the uplink port VLAN
8. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
Port VLAN. The port VLAN configuration parameters are displayed on the right.
9. Select rack,shelf and slot.
10.Select the uplink port, and click VLAN Bind to open the VLAN Binding
Configuration dialogue box.
2-26 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
11. Specify the VLAN type, and VLAN ID, and then click Bind.
 Note
The VLAN to be bound with the port should be consistent with the S-VID configured
in the Add Service Port dialogue box.
Configuring the 1:1 VLAN function
13. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > 1:1 VLAN. The 1:1 VLAN configuration parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-18.
Figure 2-18 1:1 VLAN Configuration Window
14.Select rack, shelf, slot, port, ONU, and VPort for the service port.
15.Click New to open the 1:1 VLAN Configuration dialogue box.
16.Specify the SVLAN, CVLAN, port type, and uplink port parameters.
 Note
The SVLAN and CVLAN should be consistent with the S-VID and C-VID configured
in the Add Service Port dialogue box..
17.After the configuration, click OK.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-27
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
--end--
2.3.13 Configuring Interworking VLAN
This procedure describes how to configure the VLAN interworking function based on
double VLANs. This function is used for the service interworking between the private
network users under different PON ports.
In the global isolation situation, only the user ports that are added to an interworking
VLAN can interwork with each other.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The VLANs are created.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > Interwork VLAN. The interworking VLAN parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19 Interwork VLAN Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add Interwork VLAN dialogue box.
3. Configure the interworking SVLAN and interworking CVLAN, and then click OK.
2-28 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
4. In the interworking VLAN list, select the newly-created double VLAN, select Enabled
from the Interwork VLAN drop-down list, and then click Set.
--end--
2.3.14 Querying Port VLAN Performance
This procedure describes how to query the VLAN performance statistics information
of the specified Ethernet port, including the transmitted packets, received packets,
transmitted octets, received octets, and discarded packets.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The VLANs are created.
 The port VLAN is configured.
 The port statistics function is enabled.
Steps
1. In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > More >
Port VLAN Performance. The port VLAN performance parameters are displayed on
the right, see Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20 Port VLAN Performance Query Window
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-29
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
2. Select the card and port to display the statistics information of the port VLAN
performance.
--end--
2.3.15 Configuring ONU VLAN Translation
This procedure describes how to configure ONU VLAN translation.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The VLANs are created.
 The service port is configured. For more information about service port configuration,
see 2.2 Configuring Service Ports.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN
> More > ONU VLAN Translation. The ONU VLAN translation parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-21.
Figure 2-21 ONU VLAN Translation Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU.
3. Click New to open the Port VLAN Translation Configuration Property dialogue
box.
2-30 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
4. Select the port and VLAN, configure the CVLAN and SVLAN, and then click OK.
--end--
2.3.16 Configuring VLAN Global Translation (C300)
This procedure describes how to configure the VLAN global translation function. This
function is used to translate tagged packets of a specified port to double-tagged packets
according to the translation rules.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The VLANs are created.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > VLAN Global Translation. The VLAN global translation parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 VLAN Global Translation Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add Global Translation dialogue box.
3. Configure the VLAN global translation parameters. Table 2-12 describes the VLAN
global translation configuration parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-31
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 2-12 Parameter Descriptions for VLAN Global Translation
Parameter Description
Session ID Data flow ID for global VLAN translation
Slot Card slot
Port Card port number
VLAN VLAN ID of the tagged data flow
CVLAN Inner VLAN ID of the double-tagged VLAN
SVLAN Outer VLAN ID of the double-tagged VLAN
4. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.3.17 Configuring VLAN Global Translation (C300 v2)
This procedure describes how to configure VLAN global translation. The VLAN-tagged
packets of a specified port are translated to double-tagged packets according to the
translation rules.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 Related VLANs are configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > VLAN Global Translation, and the VLAN global translation configuration
parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-23.
2-32 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-23 VLAN Global Translation Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add Global Translation dialogue box. Configure the
parameters according to the request.
To Do This
Configure the port-based VLAN
global translation rule
a. On the Based on Port tab, specify the session ID, rack,
self, slot, and port.
b. Configure the parameters. Table 2-13 describes the
parameters.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
Configure the Vport-based VLAN
global translation rule
a. On the Based on ONU VPort tab, specify the session
ID, rack, self, slot, port, ONU, and Vport.
b. Configure the parameters. Table 2-13 describes the
parameters.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
Table 2-13 Description of VLAN Global Translation Parameters
Parameter Description
Session ID Configure the ID of the traffic packets that the VLAN translation is
performed.
User VLAN The VLAN of the traffic packets before the VLAN translation
User S-VID The SVLAN of the traffic packets before the VLAN translation
C-VID The inner VLAN of the traffic packets after the VLAN translation
S-VID The outer VLAN of the traffic packets after the VLAN translation
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-33
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
VLAN Merge Enabling Enable this function to translate multiple VLANs into one VLAN.
--end--
2.3.18 Configuring VLAN Multicast Packet Forwarding Control
Function
This procedure introduces how to control forwarding the multicast packets based on
the specified VLAN. Unknown multicast packets can be flooded or dropped. And all the
multicast packets can be flooded.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > VLAN Multicast Packet Forwarding Control, and the parameters to
control multicast packet forwarding are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-24.Figure 2-24 VLAN Multicast Packet Forwarding Control Configuration Window
2. Select a VLAN, and click Modify to open the Modify Multicast Packet Forwarding
Control dialogue box.
3. Configure the multicast packet forwarding control parameters, and then click OK.
--end--
2-34 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
2.3.19 Configuring Smart QinQ Global Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the smart QinQ global parameters.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > More >
Smart QinQ Global Parameter Configuration. The smart QinQ global parameters
are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Smart QinQ Global Parameter Configuration Window
2. Select Enable Global QinQ or Disable, and then click Apply.
 Note
The configuration will be effective after the device is restarted.
--end--
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-35
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
2.3.20 Enabling Smart QinQ (C300)
This procedure describes how to enable the smart QinQ function for the OLT PON port, 
ONU, Ethernet port, or SmartGroup.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global QinQ function is enabled.
Steps
1. In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > More >
Smart QinQ Enabling. The smart QinQ parameters are displayed on the right, see 
Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Smart QinQ Enabling Configuration Window
2. In the configuration window, you can perform the following operations.
To Do This
Enable the smart QinQ function
for an OLT port
a. On the OLT/ONU tab, select the rack, shelf, slot, and port.
b. Select Based on OLT after QinQ Enabling.
c. A Confirm dialogue box appears. Click Yes.
2-36 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
To Do This
If the smart QinQ function for the OLT PON port is enabled,
the smart QinQ function for all the ONUs connected to this
OLT port will be disabled.
Enable the smart QinQ function
for an ONU
a. On the OLT/ONU tab, select the rack, shelf, slot, and port.
b. Select Based on ONU after QinQ Enabling
c. In the ONU list, select an ONU, and then click Enable.
d. A confirmation dialogue box appears. Click OK.
If the smart QinQ function for the ONU is enabled, the
smart QinQ function for the OLT port to which the ONU
connects will be disabled.
Enable the smart QinQ function
for the uplink Ethernet port
a. On the Ethernet tab, select the rack, shelf, and slot.
b. In the port list, select a port, and then click Enable.
c. A confirmation dialogue box appears. Click OK.
Enable the smart QinQ function
for a Smartgroup
a. On the SmartGroup tab, select a SmartGroup, and then
click Enable.
b. A confirmation dialogue box appears. Click OK.
--end--
2.3.21 Configuring Smart QinQ
This procedure describes how to add different outer VLAN tags to different service
packets to identify the services.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global QinQ function is enabled.
 The QinQ function for the related port is enabled.
Context
When the OLT is connected with multiple ONUs, which works as the layer-2 switches,
and the ONUs are connected with DSLAM devices, the OLT performs the convergence
and switching functions of the MAN. The OLT adds different outer VLAN tags to different
service packets to identify the services.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > Smart QinQ Configuration. The smart QinQ parameters are displayed on
the right, see Figure 2-27.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-37
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-27 NE Protocol Manager Window - Smart QinQ Configuration
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, and port.
3. Click New to open the Add Smart QinQ Configuration dialogue box.
4. Configure the smart QinQ parameters. Table 2-14 describes the smart QinQ
configuration parameters.
Table 2-14 Descriptions of Smart QinQ Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
Matched Rule Type The NE supports the following smart QinQ configuration rules.
 Based on the CoS priority
 Based on CVLAN + CoS
 Based on Tag + Ethernet
 Based on the CVLAN range
 Based on CVLAN transparent transmission
 Based on the Ethernet type
Starting VID Starting VLAN ID of the CVLAN range
Ending VID Ending VLAN ID of the CVLAN range
EtherType Ethernet type, which is effective only when the matched rule is 
EtherType, including:
 ARP
 IPoE
 PPPoE Discovery Phase
2-38 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
 PPPoE Session Phase
 User Defined
User CoS Service priority, which is effective only when the matched rule is CoS
S-VID Outer VLAN that corresponds to the PON port
S-Tag CoS Service priority of the outer VLAN that corresponds to the PON port
5. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.3.22 Configuring Smart QinQ Based on Smartgroup
This procedure describes how to configure smart QinQ based on Smartgroup.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The LACP aggregation group is configured.
 The global QinQ function is configured. For more information about the global QinQ
configuration, see 2.3.19 Configuring Smart QinQ Global Parameters.
 The QinQ function for the Smartgroup is enabled. For more information about
enabling the QinQ function, see 2.3.20 Enabling Smart QinQ (C300).
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > Smart QinQ Configuration based on SmartGroup. The smart QinQ
parameters for the Smartgroup are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-28.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-39
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-28 SmartGroup QinQ Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add Smart QinQ Configuration dialogue box.
3. Configure the smart QinQ parameters based on the Smartgroup. Table 2-15
describes the parameters.
Table 2-15 Description of SmartGroup-Based Smart QinQ Parameters
Parameter Description
Port ID of the Smartgroup that needs to be configured with smart QinQ
Matched Rule Type The NE supports the following smart QinQ configuration rules.
 Based on the CoS priority
 Based on CVLAN + CoS
 Based on Tag + Ethernet
 Based on the CVLAN range
 Based on CVLAN transparent transmission
 Based on the Ethernet type
Starting VID Starting VLAN ID of the CVLAN range
Ending VID Ending VLAN ID of the CVLAN range
EtherType Ethernet type, which is effective only when the matched rule is 
EtherType, including:
 ARP
 IPoE
 PPPoE Discovery Phase
2-40 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
 PPPoE Session Phase
 User Defined
User CoS Service priority, which is effective only when the matched rule is CoS
S-VID Outer VLAN that corresponds to the PON port
S-Tag CoS Service priority of the outer VLAN that corresponds to the PON port
4. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.3.23 Limiting Port VLAN Rate
This procedure describes how to limit the rate that the port sends or receives the
packets of the specified VLAN.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The related VLAN is created.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > Port VLAN Rate Limiting. The parameters to limit port VLAN rate are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-29.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-41
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-29 Port VLAN Rate Limiting Configuration Window
2. Select a card, andthen click New to open the Port VLAN Rate Limiting dialogue
box.
3. Configure the port, VLAN, and direction parameters. Table 2-16 describes the port
VLAN rate limiting configuration parameters.
Table 2-16 Descriptions of Port VLAN Rate Limiting Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
Port Port whose VLAN rate needs to be limited
VLAN When the VLAN rate is configured, the system limits the rate that
the port sends or receives the packets of the specified VLAN.
Direction  Ingress: Limit the rate in the traffic inbound direction.
 Egress: Limit the rate in the traffic outbound direction.
4. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
2.3.24 Limiting VLAN Packet Storm Rate
This procedure describes how to limit the rate to send or receive broadcast, multicast, or
unknown unicast packets of the specified VLAN.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
2-42 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The related VLAN is created.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > VLAN Packet Storm Rate Limiting. The parameters for VLAN packet
storm rate limiting are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-30.
Figure 2-30 VLAN Packet Storm Rate Limiting Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add VLAN Packet Storm Rate Limiting dialogue box.
3. Configure the VLAN and related traffic rate, and then click OK.
--end--
2.3.25 Configuring MVLAN Translation
This procedure introduces how to translate the MVLAN into CVLAN.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is created.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-43
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
More > MVLAN Translation. The MVLAN translation configuration parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-31.
Figure 2-31 MVLAN Translation Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Adding MVLAN Translation dialogue box.
3. Specify the MVLAN ID and CVLAN ID, and then click OK.
--end--
2.3.26 Enabling VLAN CoS Mapping Function
The VLAN CoS mapping function is used to add specified inner and outer VLAN tags
to the subscriber service packets according to the service packet priority and system-
defined translation rules.
This procedure describes how to enable the VLAN CoS mapping function.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
2-44 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN > 
VLAN CoS Mapping Enabling. The parameters to enable the VLAN CoS mapping
function are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 VLAN CoS Mapping Enabling Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, and slot.
3. Select a port, and then click Enable to enable the VLAN CoS mapping function.
--end--
2.3.27 Configuring Port MVLAN Translation
This procedure introduces how to translate the MVLAN into user CVLAN for the
specified port.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is created.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose VLAN
> More > Port MVLAN Translation. The port MVLAN translation configuration
parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-33.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-45
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-33 Port MVLAN Translation Configuration Window
2. Select rack, shelf, slot, port and PVC.
3. Click New to open the Adding MVLAN Translation dialogue box.
4. Configure the MVLAN ID, CVLAN Mode, and CVLAN ID, and then click OK.
--end--
2.4 Multicast Management
2.4.1 Overview
Service Description
With the development of multimedia services and stream media in the IP network,
multicast has become a new and popular service. Multicast is used in stream media,
distance learning, video conference, IPTV, online game, data copy, and other point-to-
multipoint data transmission services.
Service Features
The NE provides controllable multicast services, which support IGMPv1/v2/v3, IGMP
snooping, IGMP proxy, and IGMP router.
2.4.2 Configuring IGMP Global Parameters
This procedure describes how to enable the IGMP function and configure the IGMP
global parameters.
2-46 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
Multicast > IGMP Parameters. The IGMP global parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 IGMP Global Configuration Window
2. On the IGMP Parameters tab, configure the parameters. Table 2-17 describes the
IGMP parameters.
Table 2-17 Description of IGMP Global Parameters
Parameter Description
IGMP Status Configure whether to enable the IGMP protocol.
Aging Time Aging time of the IGMP group member, only effective in IGMP
snooping mode
Preview Recognition Time Shortest time to generate a preview record
Channel Access Control Configure whether to enable CAC.
If CAC is enabled, the IPTV service on the user port takes effect.
Only the subscribers who order the service package can view
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-47
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
the channels in the package. If CAC is disabled, the user port
permissions do not take effect. The subscribers (on the receiving
port of the MVLAN) can view the channels created in the MVLAN.
Preview Enable Configure whether to enable the preview function.
Preview Reset Time Time to reset the preview count
Span-VLAN Status Configure whether to enable the span-VLAN function.
When the user VLAN is different from the multicast VLAN, the span-
VLAN function needs to be enabled.
Group Bandwidth Limited Configure whether to enable the bandwidth control function.
When this function is enabled, if the bandwidth of a multicast
group exceeds the current available bandwidth, you cannot add
subscribers to the multicast group.
Maximum Records Maximum number of CDRs
CDR Report Threshold CDR report threshold, which cannot exceed the maximum number of
CDRs
Generate CDR On Generate CDRs in the following conditions.
 Preview
 Too Many Previews
 Deny
Robustness Variable Configure the robustness variable when the multicast mode is IGMP
proxy.
The robustness variable is used to enhance the system security. If a
subnet is unstable and loses packets, the robustness variable needs
to be increased. It affects the member aging time and packet retry
times.
Query Interval Configure the IGMP query interval when the multicast mode is IGMP
proxy.
Query Maximum
Response Time
Configure the maximum response time for IGMP global query when
the multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
You can increase the maximum response time to reduce the
response interval of the packets.
Last Member Query
Interval
Configure the query interval for the last IGMP member when the
multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
Last Member Query Count Configure the query count for the last IGMP member when the
multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
2-48 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
If the system does not respond to the packet when the queries reach
the configured count and the maximum query response time is
exceeded, it indicates that the subscriber logs out.
Unsolicited Report Interval Configure the time interval to send the report packet in delay when
the multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
In IGMP snooping mode, the active report function of multicast
programs becomes ineffective.
3. Click the Export CDR tab,select Export CDR, configure the CDR generation time
and server file storage path, and then click Set.
The system will export the CDRs to a file at the specified time and sends the file to
the CDR receiving server. The file format is file name+date.csv.
--end--
2.4.3 Configuring User Interface Parameters
This procedure describes how to enable the UNI IGMP function and configure the IGMP
interface parameters.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
Multicast > UNI Interface Parameters. The IGMP UNI parameters are displayed
on the right, see Figure 2-35.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-49
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-35 Multicast UNI Interface Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU where the user port is located.
3. In the Port area, select a port number. The IGMP parameters of this port are
displayed.
4. Click Modify to open the Interface Configuration dialogue box.
5. Configure the IGMP interface parameters, and then click Set. Table 2-18 describes
the user interface parameters.
Table 2-18 Description of IGMP User Interface Parameter
Parameter Description
Groups Limit Multicast groups that a user interface can be added to
Administrative Status Configure whether to enable the port IGMP function.
Last Member Query Interval Configure the query interval for the last IGMP member when the
multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
Query Response Time Configure the maximum query response time when the
multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
Fast Leave When this function is enabled and the subscriber reports the
leave packet, the port leaves the multicast group immediately.
Proxy IP Configure the source IP address of the downstream query
packet when the multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
IGMP Version IGMPv2 is commonly used.
Robustness Configure the robustness variable when the multicast mode is
IGMP proxy.
2-50 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
The robustness variable is used to enhance the system security.
If a subnet is unstable and packets are lost, the robustness
variable needs to be increased. It affects the member aging time
and packet retry times.
--end--
2.4.4 Configuring IGMP MVLAN
This procedure describes how to configure the IGMP MVLAN parameters, including
service VLAN, source port, receiving port, and multicast group.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Context
When the NE needs to carry the IPTV service, at least one MVLAN needs to be
configured. If multiple carriers provide services, multiple MVLANs can be configured to
separate the IPTV services for different carriers.
After the MVLANs are configured, the system copies the IPTV program stream to the
subscribers in the MVLAN that the current program belongs to. The subscribers in the
MVLANs, which the current program does not belong to, cannot view the program. This
avoids unnecessary data copy.
The system supports span-VLAN multicast. It can copy the programs from an MVLAN to
a user VLAN.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> Multicast > Multicast VLAN. The MVLAN parameters are displayed in the right
pane, see Figure 2-36.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-51
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-36 Multicast VLAN Configuration Window
2. Configure the MVLAN basic parameters.
a. Select New in the MVLAN list.
b. On the Basic tab, configure the MVLAN basic parameters. Table 2-19 describes
the basic parameters.
Table 2-19 Description of MVLAN Basic Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN MVLAN ID
Working Mode MVLAN multicast working mode, supporting Snooping, Proxy,
and Router
Host IP Source IP address of the report/leave packet in IGMP Proxy
mode
Default: 192.168.2.14
Maximum Groups Maximum MVLAN groups
Group Filter Configure whether to enable the MVLAN group filter function.
 Enable: The host needs to verify that the group address is
configured on the router when sending the IGMP join packet
to the router. The groups whose addresses are configured
are called administrative groups.
 Disable: The host does not need to verify that the group
address is configured on the router when sending the IGMP
2-52 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
join packet to the router. The groups whose addresses are
known are called dynamic groups.
If the span-VLAN function is enabled, the group filter function
must be enabled.
Administrative Status Configure whether to enable the MVLAN IGMP function.
 Enable: The system accepts the IGMP multicast packets and
processes them.
 Drop: The system drops the IGMP multicast packets.
Packet Priority When the IGMP mode is IGMP snooping, the IGMP packets
forwarded by the NE to the network side are processed
according to the priority of the IGMP service flow that the
subscriber belongs to.
When the IGMP mode is IGMP proxy, the IGMP packets
forwarded by the NE to the network side are processed
according to the priority of the IGMP packets in the MVLAN.
IGMP Version of Host Version of the IGMP request packets sent by the uplink port
c. After the configuration, click New.
3. Configure the multicast channels.
a. Select the newly-created MVLAN in the MVLAN list, click the Channel IP tab, and
then click New to open the MVR Configuration–Add Group dialogue box.
b. Configure the channel parameters. Table 2-20 describes the channel parameters.
Table 2-20 Description of Channel Parameters
Parameter Description
Source IP The source IP address of the report packets that the NE uses to
responds to the upper-layer devices in IGMP proxy mode
Default: 0.0.0.0
Channel IP MVLAN group address
Prejoin When the prejoin function is enabled for an MVLAN group, the
group sends the join packets periodically. The multicast steam
arrives at the NE directly to reduce the VOD delay. The proxy
does not forward the IGMP reports to the prejoined multicast
groups.
Default: Disable
Bandwidth Cost (kbps) Multicast group bandwidth
c. After the configuration, click OK.
4. Configure the multicast resource port.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-53
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
a. Click the Source Port tab, and select the uplink card.
b. Select the uplink port and then click Bind.
 Note
The MVLAN source port can be the NE uplink port or the SmartGroup port.
5. Configure the MVLAN receiving port.
a. Click the Receive Port tab, and select the user card, PON port, and ONU where
the user port is located.
b. Select a user port and then click Bind.
--end--
2.4.5 Configuring an IGMP SPAN VLAN
This procedure describes how to configure an IGMP SPAN VLAN, and the IGMP
packets of the specified VLAN will be processed instead of being transparently
forwarded.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
Multicast > SPAN VLAN. The SPAN VLAN configuration parameters are displayed
on the right, see Figure 2-37.
2-54 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-37 IGMP SPAN VLAN Configuration Window
2. Configure the VLAN in the VLAN ID text box, and then click New.
--end--
2.5 IGMP Management
2.5.1 Configuring IGMP Global Parameters
This procedure describes how to enable the IGMP function and configure the IGMP
global parameters.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > IGMP Global Parameters. The IGMP global parameters are displayedon
the right, see Figure 2-38.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-55
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-38 IGMP Global Parameter Configuration Window
2. Configure the IGMP global parameters according to the request. Figure 2-38
describes the IGMP global parameters.
Table 2-21 Description of IGMP Global Parameters
Parameter Description
IGMP Status Configure whether to enable IGMP function.
Host Tracking Status Configure whether to enable the administrative function of
IGMP host tracking.
Multicast Bandwidth Control
Enabling
Configure whether to enable the bandwidth control function.
 Enabled: The system will check the multicast traffic on the
user port before a user attempts to join a new multicast
group. If the total multicast traffic on the user port has
exceeded the configured rate of port, the user will not be
allowed to join the multicast group.
 Disabled: The user may join any number of multicast
groups even though the total multicast traffic on the user
port has exceeded the configured rate of port.
Multicast Group Rejoin Interval Configure the interval of IGMP requests sent by the multicast
group that the prejoin is enabled.
SPAN-VLAN Enabling Configure whether to enable the span-VLAN multicast
function.
Multicast traffic will be forwarded in all VLANs if the function is
enabled.
General Leaving Enabling Configure whether to enable the function to handle the
general leave message.
2-56 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
The general leave message will be handled if this function is
enabled.
3. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.5.2 Configuring IGMP UNI Interface Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the IGMP user network interface parameters,
including administrative status, IGMP version, fast leave, and bandwidth.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > UNI Interface Parameters. The IGMP UNI parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39 UNI Interface Parameter Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, and slot.
3. Select the user port, and then click Modify to open the Modify UNI Interface
Parameters dialogue box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-57
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
4. Configure the IGMP interface parameters. Table 2-22 describes the IGMP UNI
interface parameters.
Table 2-22 Description of IGMP UNI Interface Parameters
Parameter Description
Administrative Status Configure whether to enable the IGMP administrative function.
IGMP version Configure the IGMP version.
Fast Leave When this function is enabled and the subscriber reports the
leave packet, the port leaves the multicast group immediately.
Bandwidth Configure the bandwidth of the user interface.
5. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.5.3 Configuring IGMP MVLAN
This procedure describes how to configure the IGMP MVLAN, including the protocol
parameters, proxy parameters, and group filter parameters.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The IGMP function is enabled.
Steps
Creating an MVLAN
2. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> IGMP > MVLAN Configuration. The parameters to configure IGMP MVLAN are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-40.
2-58 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-40 IGMP MVLAN Configuration Window
3. Select New in the MVLAN list, enter the MVLAN ID in the MVLAN ID text box, and
then click New to create a new MVLAN.
Configuring MVLAN parameters
5. Select the newly-created MVLAN in the MVLAN list, and then configure the MVLAN
parameters in the right pane, see Figure 2-41.
Figure 2-41 Configuring IGMP MVLAN Parameters
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-59
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 2-23 describes the MVLAN configuration parameters.
Table 2-23 Description of IGMP MVLAN Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
Administrative Status Configure whether to enable the IGMP administrative function.
IGMPv1/2/3 Operation
Mode
Configure the operation mode of the IGMP packets.
Aging Time Configure the aging time of the IGMP group member, and this option
is only effective in IGMP snooping mode.
Working Mode Configure the IGMP working mode.
 Snooping: Transparently forward IGMP packets. Snooping
protocol is defined in RFC 4541 and TR-101.
 Spr: Transparently forward IGMP general query and suppress
IGMP report/leave for existing group membership. SPR (
Snooping with Proxy Reporting) is defined in TR-101.
 Proxy: Act as a host on the V interface and act as a router on the
U interface. Proxy protocol is defined in RFC4605.
 Router: Act as a terminal on the V interface and act as a router
on the U interface. Router is defined in TR-101.
IP Multicast Service Model Configure the control model of the ASM/SSM service.
 ASM: Only ASM requests are permitted. ASM is defined in RFC
1112.
 SSM: Only SSM requests are permitted. SSM is defined in RFC
3569.
 ASM and SSM: Both ASM and SSM requests are permitted.
SSM IP Configure the SSM IP address.
All SSM requests must be in the same IP network segment as the
configured SSM IP address and net mask.
SSM IP Mask Configure the mask of SSM IP address.
All SSM requests must be in the same IP network segment as the
configured SSM IP address and net mask.
Robustness Configure the robustness variable when the multicast mode is IGMP
proxy.
The robustness variable is used to enhance the system security. If a
subnet is unstable and loses packets, the robustness variable needs
to be increased. It affects the member aging time and packet retry
times.
Host IGMP Version Configure the administrative version of IGMP packet sent on the
host interface.
2-60 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
 Auto: IGMP host version is dynamically determined by the
attached router version, according to IGMP Host Compatibility
Mode described in RFC 3376.
 IGMPv2: IGMP host version is IGMPv2.
 IGMPv3: IGMP host version is IGMPv3.
Host IP Configure the source IP address of IGMP packet sent on the host
interface.
Unsolicited Report Interval Configure the time interval for sending the report packet in delay
when the multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
In IGMP snooping mode, the active report function of multicast
programs becomes ineffective.
Router IP Configure the source IP address of IGMP query packets sent on the
router interface.
IGMP Packet Priority Configure the 802.1p priority of IGMP packets sent by the device.
This option is only effective in Proxy and SPR mode.
Startup Query Count Configure the IGMP startup query count.
Query Interval Configure the IGMP query interval when the multicast mode is IGMP
proxy.
Maximum Response
Interval
Configure the maximum response time for IGMP global query when
the multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
You can increase the maximum response time to reduce the
response interval of the packets.
Last Member Query
Interval
Configure the query interval for the last IGMP member when the
multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
Last Member Query Count Configure the query count for the last IGMP member when the
multicast mode is IGMP proxy.
If the system does not respond to the packet when the queries reach
the configured count and the maximum query response time is
exceeded, it indicates that the subscriber logs out.
Startup Query Interval Configure the IGMP startup query interval in the MVLAN when
system is started up or port is up.
General Query Packet
Protocol Version
Configure the running version of IGMP packet sent on the hostinterface.
DSCP Configure the DSCP value of the IGMP packets that the device
sends.
This parameter is valid in the proxy mode.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-61
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
Group Filter Enabling Configure whether to enable the administrative function of the group
filter.
6. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.5.4 Configuring IGMP Receiving Ports
This procedure introduces how to configure the IGMP receiving ports.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The MVLAN has been created.
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the Left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Receiving Port. The parameters to configure the IGMP receiving ports are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-42.
Figure 2-42 IGMP Receiving Port Configuration Window
2. In the MVLAN ID list, select the MVLAN.
3. Select the rack, shelf, slot, and port.
2-62 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
4. Select one PVC which is not the receiving port, and click Yes to set the port as the
IGMP receiving port.
--end--
2.5.5 Configuring IGMP Source Ports
This procedure introduces how to configure the IGMP source ports. Both the uplink ports
or the smartgroup ports can be configured as the IGMP source ports.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The MVLAN has been created.
 The Smartgroup has been configured.
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the Left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Source Port. The IGMP source port configuration parameters are displayed
on the right, see Figure 2-43.
Figure 2-43 IGMP Source Port Configuration Window
2. In the IGMP source port configuration window, you can perform the following
operations to configure the IGMP source port.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-63
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
Configure the uplink ports as the IGMP source
port
a. In the MVLAN ID list, select the MVLAN.
b. On the Port Configuration tab, specify the
rack, shelf, slot, and port.
c. Select one port which is not the source port,
and click Yes to set the port as the IGMP
source port.
Configure the smartgroup ports as the IGMP
source port
a. In the MVLAN ID list, select the MVLAN.
b. On the Smartgroup Configuration tab,
select one port which is not the source port,
and click Yes to set the smartgroup port as
the IGMP source port.
--end--
2.5.6 Configuring IGMP Source Pseudo-wire
This procedure introduces how to configure the pseudo-wire as the MVLAN source.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The pseudo-wire name is configured.
 The MVLAN is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Source Pseudo-wire. The source pseudo-wire configuration parameters
are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-44.
2-64 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-44 IGMP Source Pseudo-wire Configuration Window
2. Select an MVLAN from the MVLAN ID list.
3. Click New to open the Add Source Pseudo-wire dialogue box.
4. Type the pseudo-wire name and then click OK.
--end--
2.5.7 Configuring IGMP Multicast Group Filtering
This procedure introduces how to configure the IP range for the specified multicast
group, and only the packets of the multicast group within the specified group range are
admitted and forwarded.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is configured and the group filter function is enabled. For more
information about enabling the group filter function, see 2.5.3 Configuring IGMP
MVLAN.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-65
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Group Filter. The group filter configuration parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-45.
Figure 2-45 IGMP Group Filter Configuration Window
2. Select an MVLAN from the MVLAN ID list.
3. Click New to open the Create IGMP Group Filter dialogue box.
4. Configure the starting and ending group IP, and then click OK.
--end--
2.5.8 Querying IGMP Dynamic Group Information
This procedure introduces how to query the dynamic multicast group information,
including the group IP, source IP, and filter mode.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is configured.
2-66 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Dynamic Group Information. The dynamic multicast group information is
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-46.
Figure 2-46 IGMP Dynamic Group Information
2. Select an MVLAN from the MVLAN ID list and its corresponding dynamic multicast
group information is displayed.
--end--
2.5.9 Querying IGMP Online User Information
This procedure introduces how to query the IGMP online user information, including the
group IP, source IP, and filter mode.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is configured.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-67
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Online User Information. The IGMP online user information is displayed
on the right, see Figure 2-47.
Figure 2-47 Online User Information Window
2. Select an MVLAN from the MVLAN ID list, configure the query conditions, and then
click Query to display the related online user information.
--end--
2.5.10 Configuring IGMP Multicast Group Bandwidth
This procedure describes how to configure the IGMP multicast group bandwidth to
ensure the service quality.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global multicast bandwidth control function is enabled.
 The MVLAN is configured.
2-68 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> IGMP > Multicast Group Bandwidth. The IGMP multicast group bandwidth
parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-48.
Figure 2-48 IGMP Multicast Group Bandwidth Configuration Window
2. Select one MVLAN from the MVLAN list, and then click New to open the Add
Multicast Group Bandwidth dialogue box.
3. Configure the group IP and bandwidth, and then click OK. Table 2-24 describes the
IGMP multicast group bandwidth parameters.
Table 2-24 Description of IGMP Multicast Group Bandwidth Parameters
Parameter Description
Group IP Configure the IP address of the multicast group.
Multicast Group Bandwidth Configure the bandwidth of the multicast group.
Default: 2048 kbps
--end--
2.5.11 Configuring IGMP Multicast Prejoin
This procedure describes how to configure the IGMP multicast prejoin function, and the
multicast packets are forwarded to the access device in advance, so as to reduce the 
VOD delay and improve the multicast service.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-69
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global multicast bandwidthcontrol function is enabled.
 The MVLAN is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> IGMP > Multicast Group Prejoin. The IGMP multicast prejoin parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-49.
Figure 2-49 GMP Multicast Prejoin Configuration Window
2. Select one MVLAN from the MVLAN list, and then click New to open the Add
Multicast Group Prejoin dialogue box.
3. Configure the group IP and source IP, and then click OK. Table 2-25 describes the
IGMP multicast prejoin parameters.
Table 2-25 Description of IGMP Multicast Prejoin Parameters
Parameter Description
Group IP Configure the IP address of the multicast group.
Source IP For the snooping mode, the source IP address is the source IP
address in the user report packets.
For the proxy mode, the source IP address is the host IP
address.
2-70 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
--end--
2.5.12 Binding IGMP Multicast Static Port
This procedure describes how to bind the multicast service with the specified user port,
and prevent the illegal user from obtaining the multicast service.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global multicast bandwidth control function is enabled.
 The MVLAN is configured.
 The receiving port is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Multicast Group Static Port Binding. The parameters of IGMP multicast
static port binding are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-50.
Figure 2-50 IGMP Multicast Static Port Binding Configuration Window
2. Select one MVLAN from the MVLAN list, select the group IP, and select the port to
bind the multicast service.
3. Click New to open the Create Multicast Group Static Port Binding dialogue box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-71
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
4. Configure the group IP and source IP, and then click OK. Table 2-26 describes the
IGMP multicast static port binding parameters.
Table 2-26 Description of IGMP Multicast Static Port Binding Parameters
Parameter Description
Group IP Configure the IP address of the multicast group.
Source IP For the snooping mode, the source IP address is the source IP
address in the user report packets.
For the proxy mode, the source IP address is the host IP
address.
--end--
2.5.13 Querying IGMP Multicast Traffic
This procedure describes how to query the IGMP multicast traffic information for the
specified MVLAN.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> IGMP > Multicast Group Traffic. The IGMP multicast group traffic information is
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-51.
2-72 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-51 IGMP Multicast Group Traffic Information Window
2. Click New to open the Add Multicast Group Traffic dialogue box.
3. Configure the MVLAN and group IP, and then click OK to display the multicast traffic
information of the specified MVLAN.
--end--
2.5.14 Querying IGMP Active Multicast Group Information
This procedure introduces how to query the IGMP active multicast group information of
the specified ONU or port. The information includes the MVLAN, group IP, source IP,
multicast group type, and multicast source filter mode.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example to query the multicast group information of the
specified DSL port.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Active Multicast Group, and the parameters to query the active multicast
group information are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-52.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-73
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-52 IGMP Active Multicast Group Information Query Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, and port to display the corresponding multicast
information.
--end--
2.5.15 Querying IGMP Multicast Information
This procedure introduces how to query the multicast information of the specified IGMP,
including the active user number of the MVLAN.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
IGMP > Interface Statistics, and the parameters to query the multicast active user
information are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-53.
2-74 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-53 IGMP Multicast Information Query Information
2. Select an MVLAN in the left pane to query the corresponding group IP and active
user number.
--end--
2.6 MLD Multicast Management
2.6.1 Configuring Global MLD Parameters
This procedure describes how to enable the MLD function and configure the global MLD
parameters.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD Multicast > MLD Parameters. The MLD global parameters are displayed on
the right, see Figure 2-54.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-75
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-54 MLD Parameter Configuration Window
2. Configure the MLD parameters. Table 2-27 describes the MLD parameters.
Table 2-27 Description of MLD Parameters
Parameter Description
MLD Status Configure whether to enable MLD function.
Aging Time (s) Configure the aging time of the MLD group member.
Span-VLAN Status Configure whether to enable the span-VLAN function.
When the user VLAN is different from the multicast VLAN, the span-
VLAN function needs to be enabled.
Bandwidth Control Configure whether to enable the bandwidth control function.
 Enable: The system will check the multicast traffic on the user
port before a user attempts to join a new multicast group. If
the total multicast traffic on the user port has exceeded the
configured rate of port, the user will not be allowed to join the
multicast group.
 Disable: The user may join any number of multicast groups even
though the total multicast traffic on the user port has exceeded
the configured rate of port.
Host Tracking Status Configure whether to enable the administrative status of MLD host
tracking.
Max Group Threshold Configure the maximum group threshold.
Log Enable Configure whether to enable the MLD log function.
2-76 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Robustness Variable Configure the robustness variable when the multicast mode is MLD
proxy.
The robustness variable is used to enhance the system security. If a
subnet is unstable and loses packets, the robustness variable needs
to be increased. It affects the member aging time and packet retry
times.
Query Interval Configure the MLD query interval when the multicast mode is MLD
proxy.
Query Maximum
Response Time
Configure the maximum response time for MLD global query when
the multicast mode is MLD proxy.
You can increase the maximum response time to reduce the
response interval of the packets.
Last Member Query
Interval
Configure the query interval for the last MLD member when the
multicast mode is MLD proxy.
Last Member Query Count Configure the query count for the last MLD member when the
multicast mode is MLD proxy.
If the system does not respond to the packet when the queries reach
the configured count and the maximum query response time is
exceeded, it indicates that the subscriber logs out.
Unsolicited Report Interval Configure the time interval for sending the report packet in delay
when the multicast mode isMLD proxy.
In MLD snooping mode, the active report function of multicast
programs becomes ineffective.
CDR Server IP Configure the CDR server IP address.
3. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.6.2 Configuring MLD Interface Parameters
This procedure describes how to enable the UNI MLD function and configure the MLD
interface parameters.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-77
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD Multicast > MLD Interface. The MLD UNI parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-55.
Figure 2-55 MLD Interface Parameter Configuration Window
2. Select the card, PON port, and ONU where the user port is located.
3. In the Port area, select a port number. The MLD parameters of this port are
displayed.
4. Click Modify to open the Modify MLD Interface dialogue box.
5. Configure the MLD interface parameters. Table 2-28 describes the MLD interface
parameters.
Table 2-28 Description of MLD Interface Parameters
Parameter Description
Administrative Status  Enable: Enable the MLD service.
 Drop: The system drops the MLD multicast packets.
Fast Leave Enable When this function is enabled and the subscriber reports the
leave packet, the port leaves the multicast group immediately.
MLD Version Configure the version of MLD protocol which is running on this
port.
2-78 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Proxy IP Address Configure the source IP address of the downstream query
packet when the multicast mode is MLD proxy.
Maximum Current Groups Configure the maximum current active multicast groups on this
port.
Query Interval Configure the MLD query interval.
Last Member Query Interval Configure the query interval for the last MLD member.
Query Max Response Time Configure the maximum query response time.
Robustness Configure the robustness variable.
The robustness variable is used to enhance the system security.
If a subnet is unstable and loses packets, the robustness
variable needs to be increased. It affects the member aging time
and packet retry times.
Maximum Packet Limit Configure the maximum number of the MLD packets that can
be processed in 1 second on this port. The extra packets will be
discarded.
MVLAN Auto Translation
Enable
Configure whether to enable the automatic translation function
between MVLAN and CVLAN.
6. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.6.3 Configuring MLD Multicast VLAN
This procedure describes how to configure the MLD MVLAN parameters, including the
service VLAN, source port, receiving port, and multicast group.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> MLD Multicast > MLD Multicast VLAN. The MLD MVLAN parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-56.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-79
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-56 MLD MVLAN Configuration Window
2. Configure the MVLAN basic parameters.
a. Select New in the MVLAN list.
b. On the Basic tab, configure the MVLAN basic parameters. Table 2-29 describes
the MVLAN basic parameters.
Table 2-29 Description of MVLAN Basic Parameters
Parameter Description
MVLAN ID Configure the MVLAN ID.
Working Mode MVLAN multicast working mode, supporting Snooping, Proxy,
and Router
Host IP Source IP address of the report/leave packet in MLD Proxy
mode
Max Multicast Groups Configure the maximum MVLAN groups.
Group Filter Configure whether to enable the MVLAN group filter function.
 Enable: The host needs to verify that the group address is
configured on the router when sending the MLD join packet
to the router. The groups whose addresses are configured
are called administrative groups.
 Disable: The host does not need to verify that the group
address is configured on the router when sending the MLD
2-80 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
join packet to the router. The groups whose addresses are
known are called dynamic groups.
If the span-VLAN function is enabled, the group filter function
must be enabled.
Administrative Status Configure whether to enable the MVLAN MLD function.
 Enable: The system accepts the MLD multicast packets and
processes them.
 Disable: Disable the MLD multicast service.
 Drop: The system drops the MLD multicast packets.
MLD Packet Priority When the MLD mode is MLD snooping, the MLD packets
forwarded by the NE to the network side are processed
according to the priority of the MLD service flow that the
subscriber belongs to.
When the MLD mode is MLD proxy, the MLD packets forwarded
by the NE to the network side are processed according to the
priority of the MLD packets in the MVLAN.
MLD Version of Host Configure the version of the MLD request packets sent by the
uplink port.
c. After the configuration, click New.
3. Configure the multicast groups.
a. Select the newly-created MVLAN in the MVLAN list, click the Groups tab, and
then click New to open the Add Group dialogue box .
b. Configure the group parameters. Table 2-30 describes the group parameters.
Table 2-30 Description of Group Parameters
Parameter Description
Source IP The source IP address of the report packets that the NE uses to
responds to the upper-layer devices in MLD proxy mode
Default: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Start Group IP Configure the starting IP address of the MVLAN group.
Batch Number Configure the batch number for the MVLAN group.
Prejoin Status When the prejoin function is enabled for an MVLAN group, the
group sends the join packets periodically. The multicast stream
arrives at the NE directly to reduce the VOD delay. The proxy
does not forward the MLD reports to the prejoined multicast
groups.
Bandwidth Multicast group bandwidth
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-81
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
c. After the configuration, click OK.
4. Configure the multicast resource port.
a. Click the Source Ports tab, and select the uplink card.
b. Select the uplink port, and then click Bind.
 Note
The MVLAN source port can be the NE uplink port or the SmartGroup port.
5. Configure the MVLAN receiving port.
a. Click the Receive Ports tab, and select the card, PON port, and ONU where the
user port is located.
b. Select a user port, and click Bind.
--end--
2.6.4 Configuring an MLD SPAN VLAN
This procedure describes how to configure an MLD SPAN VLAN, and the MLD packets
of the specified VLAN will be processed instead of being transparently forwarded.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD Multicast > SPAN VLAN. The MLD SPAN VLAN configuration parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-57.
2-82 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-57 MLD SPAN VLAN Configuration Window
2. Configure the VLAN in the VLAN ID text box, and then click New.
--end--
2.7 MLD Management
2.7.1 Configuring MLD Global Parameters
This procedure describes how to enable the MLD function and configure the MLD global
parameters.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD > MLD Global Parameters. The MLD global parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-58.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-83
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-58 MLD Global Parameter Configuration Window
2. Specify the MLD globalparameters according to the request. Table 2-31 describes
the MLD global parameters.
Table 2-31 Description of MLD Global Parameters
Parameter Description
MLD Status Configure whether to enable MLD function.
Host Tracking Status Configure whether to enable the administrative function of
MLD host tracking.
Multicast Bandwidth Control
Enabling
Configure whether to enable the bandwidth control function.
 Enabled: The system will check the multicast traffic on the
user port before a user attempts to join a new multicast
group. If the total multicast traffic on the user port has
exceeded the configured rate of port, the user will not be
allowed to join the multicast group.
 Disabled: The user may join any number of multicast
groups even though the total multicast traffic on the user
port has exceeded the configured rate of port.
Multicast Group Rejoin Interval Configure the interval of MLD requests sent by the multicast
group that the prejoin is enabled.
SPAN-VLAN Enabling Configure whether to enable the span-VLAN multicast
function.
Multicast traffic will be forwarded in all VLANs if the function is
enabled.
General Leaving Enabling Configure whether to enable the function to handle the
general leave message.
The general leave message will be handled if this function is
enabled.
3. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2-84 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
2.7.2 Configuring MLD MVLAN
This procedure describes how to configure the MLD MVLAN, including the protocol
parameters, proxy parameters, and group filter parameters.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MLD function is enabled.
Steps
Creating an MVLAN
2. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> MLD > MVLAN Configuration. The parameters to configure MLD MVLAN are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-59.
Figure 2-59 MLD MVLAN Configuration Window
3. Select New in the MVLAN list, enter the MVLAN ID in the MVLAN ID text box, and
then click New to create a new MVLAN.
Configuring MVLAN parameters
5. Select the newly-created MVLAN in the MVLAN list, and then configure the MVLAN
parameters in the right pane, see Figure 2-60.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-85
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-60 Configuring MLD MVLAN Parameters
Table 2-32 describes the MLD MVLAN configuration parameters.
Table 2-32 Description of MLD MVLAN Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
Administrative Status Configure whether to enable the MLD administrative function.
MLDv1/2 Operation Mode Configure the operation mode the MLD packets.
Aging Time Configure the aging time of the MLD group member, and this option
is only effective in MLD snooping mode.
Working Mode Configure the MLD working mode.
 Snooping: Transparently forward MLD packets. Snooping
protocol is defined in RFC 4541 and TR-101.
 Spr: Transparently forward MLD general query and suppress
MLD report/leave for existing group membership. SPR (Snooping
with Proxy Reporting) is defined in TR-101.
 Proxy: Act as a host on the V interface and act as a router on the
U interface. Proxy protocol is defined in RFC4605.
 Router: Act as a terminal on the V interface and act as a router
on the U interface. Router is defined in TR-101.
IP Multicast Service Model Configure the control model of the ASM/SSM service.
 ASM: Only ASM requests are permitted. ASM is defined in RFC
1112.
2-86 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
 SSM: Only SSM requests are permitted. SSM is defined in RFC
3569.
 ASM and SSM: Both ASM and SSM requests are permitted.
SSM IP Configure the SSM IP address.
All SSM requests must be in the same IP network segment as the
configured SSM IP address and net mask.
SSM IP Mask Configure the mask of SSM IP address.
All SSM requests must be in the same IP network segment as the
configured SSM IP address and net mask.
Robustness Configure the robustness variable when the multicast mode is MLD
proxy
The robustness variable is used to enhance the system security. If a
subnet is unstable and loses packets, the robustness variable needs
to be increased. It affects the member aging time and packet retry
times.
Host MLD Version Configure the administrative version of MLD packet sent on the host
interface.
 Auto: MLD host version is dynamically determined by the
attached router version, according to MLD Host Compatibility
Mode described in RFC 3810.
 MLDv1: MLD host version is MLD v1.
 MLDv2: MLD host version is MLD v2.
Host IP Configure the source IP address of MLD packet sent on the host
interface.
Unsolicited Report Interval Configure the time interval for sending the report packet in delay
when the multicast mode is MLD proxy.
In MLD snooping mode, the active report function of multicast
programs becomes ineffective.
Router IP Configure the source IP address of MLD query packet sent on the
router interface.
MLD Packet Priority Configure the 802.1p priority of MLD packet sent by the device.
This option is only effective in Proxy and SPR mode.
Startup Query Count Configure the MLD startup query count.
Query Interval Configure the MLD query interval when the multicast mode is MLD
proxy.
Maximum Response
Interval
Configure the maximum response time for MLD global query when
the multicast mode is MLD proxy.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-87
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
You can increase the maximum response time to reduce the
response interval of the packets.
Last Member Query
Interval
Configure the query interval for the last MLD member when the
multicast mode is MLD proxy.
Last Member Query Count Configure the query count for the last MLD member when the
multicast mode is MLD proxy.
If the system does not respond to the packet when the queries reach
the configured count and the maximum query response time is
exceeded, it indicates that the subscriber logs out.
Startup Query Interval Specify the MLD startup query interval when system is start up or
port is up.
General Query Packet
Protocol Version
Configure the running version of MLD packet sent on the host
interface.
Traffic Class Configure the traffic class value of the MLD packets that the device
sends.
This parameter is valid in the proxy mode.
Group Filter Enabling Configure whether to enable the administrative function of the group
filter.
6. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.7.3 Configuring MLD Source Ports
This procedure introduces how to configure the MLD source ports. Both the uplink ports
or the smartgroup ports can be configured as the MLD source ports.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The MVLAN has been created.
 The Smartgroup has been configured.
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the Left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD > Source Port. The MLD source port configuration parameters are displayed
on the right, see Figure 2-61.
2-88 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-61 MLD Source Port Configuration Window
2. In the MLD source port configuration window, you can perform the following
operations to configure the MLD source port.
To Do This
Configure the uplink ports as the MLD source
port
a. In the MVLAN ID list, select the MVLAN.
b. On the Port Configuration tab, specify the
rack, shelf, slot, and port.
c. Select one port which is not the source port,
and click Yes to set the port as the MLD
source port.
Configure the smartgroup ports as the MLD
source port
a. In the MVLAN ID list, select the MVLAN.
b. On the Smartgroup Configuration tab,
select one port which is not the source port,
and click Yesto set the smartgroup port as
the MLD source port.
--end--
2.7.4 Configuring MLD Source Pseudo-wire
This procedure introduces how to configure the pseudo-wire as the MVLAN source.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-89
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The pseudo-wire name is configured.
 The MVLAN is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD > Source Pseudo-wire. The source pseudo-wire configuration parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-62.
Figure 2-62 MLD Source Pseudo-wire Configuration Window
2. Select an MVLAN from the MVLAN ID list.
3. Click New to open the Add Source Pseudo-wire dialogue box.
4. Type the pseudo-wire name and then click OK.
--end--
2.7.5 Configuring MLD Receiving Ports
This procedure introduces how to configure the MLD receiving ports.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
2-90 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
 The MVLAN has been created.
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the Left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> MLD > Receiving Port. The parameters to configure the MLD receiving ports are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-63.
Figure 2-63 MLD Receiving Port Configuration Window
2. In the MVLAN ID list, select the MVLAN.
3. Select the rack, shelf, slot, and port.
4. Select one PVC which is not the receiving port, and click Yes to set the port as the
MLD receiving port.
--end--
2.7.6 Configuring MLD UNI Interface Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the MLD user network interface parameters,
including administrative status, MLD version, fast leave, and bandwidth.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-91
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> MLD > UNI Interface Parameters. The MLD UNI interface parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-64.
Figure 2-64 MLD UNI Interface Parameter Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU.
3. Select the user port, and then click Modify to open the Modify UNI Interface
Parameters dialogue box.
4. Configure the MLD interface parameters. Table 2-33 describes the MLD interface
parameters.
Table 2-33 Description of MLD Interface Parameters
Parameter Description
Administrative Status Configure whether to enable the MLD administrative function.
MLD version Configure the MLD version.
Fast Leave When this function is enabled and the subscriber reports the
leave packet, the port leaves the multicast group immediately.
Bandwidth Configure the bandwidth of the user interface.
5. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2-92 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
2.7.7 Configuring MLD Multicast Group Filtering
This procedure introduces how to configure the IP range for the specified multicast
group, and only the packets of the multicast group within the specified group range are
admitted and forwarded.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is configured and the group filter function is enabled. For more
information about enabling the group filter function, see 2.7.2 Configuring MLD
MVLAN.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD > Group Filter. The group filter configuration parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-65.
Figure 2-65 MLD Group Filter Configuration Window
2. Select an MVLAN from the MVLAN ID list.
3. Click New to open the Create MLD Group Filter dialogue box.
4. Configure the starting and ending group IP, and then click OK.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-93
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
--end--
2.7.8 Querying MLD Dynamic Group Information
This procedure introduces how to query the dynamic multicast group information,
including the group IP, source IP, and filter mode.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD > Dynamic Group Information. The dynamic multicast group information is
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-66.
Figure 2-66 MLD Dynamic Group Information
2. Select an MVLAN from the MVLAN ID list and its corresponding dynamic multicast
group information is displayed.
--end--
2-94 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
2.7.9 Querying MLD Online User Information
This procedure introduces how to query the MLD online user information, including the
group IP, source IP, and filter mode.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The MVLAN is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD > Online User Information. The MLD online user information is displayed on
the right, see Figure 2-67.
Figure 2-67 MLD Online User Information Window
2. Select an MVLAN from the MVLAN ID list, configure the query conditions, and click 
Query to display the related online user information.
--end--
2.7.10 Configuring MLD Multicast Group Bandwidth
This procedure describes how to configure the MLD multicast group bandwidth to
ensure the service quality.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-95
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global MLD multicast bandwidth control function is enabled.
 The MVLAN is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> MLD > Multicast Group Bandwidth. The MLD multicast group bandwidth
parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure 2-68.
Figure 2-68 MLD Multicast Group Bandwidth Configuration Window
2. Select one MVLAN from the MVLAN list, and then click New to open the Add
Multicast Group Bandwidth dialogue box.
3. Configure the group IP and bandwidth, and then click OK. Table 2-34 describes the
MLD multicast group bandwidth parameters.
Table 2-34 Description of MLD Multicast Group Bandwidth Parameters
Parameter Description
Group IP Configure the IP address of the multicast group.
Multicast Group Bandwidth Configure the bandwidth of the multicast group.
Default: 2048 kbps
2-96 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
--end--
2.7.11 Configuring MLD Multicast Prejoin
This procedure describes how to configure the MLD multicast prejoin function, and the
multicast stream is forwarded to the access device in advance, to reduce the VOD delay
and improve the multicast service.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global MLD multicast bandwidth control function is enabled.
 The MVLAN is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> MLD > Multicast Group Prejoin. The MLD multicast prejoin parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-69.
Figure 2-69 MLD Multicast Prejoin Configuration Window
2. Select one MVLAN from the MVLAN list, and then click New to open the Add
MulticastGroup Prejoin dialogue box.
3. Configure the group IP and source IP, and then click OK. Table 2-35 describes the
MLD multicast prejoin parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-97
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 2-35 Description of MLD Multicast Prejoin Parameters
Parameter Description
Group IP Configure the IP address of the multicast group.
Source IP For the snooping mode, the source IP address is the source IP
address in the user report packets.
For the proxy mode, the source IP address is the host IP
address.
--end--
2.7.12 Binding MLD Multicast Static Port
This procedure describes how to bind the multicast service with the specified user port,
and prevent the illegal user from obtaining the multicast service.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global MLD multicast bandwidth control function is enabled.
 The MVLAN is configured.
 The receiving port is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast
> MLD > Multicast Group Static Port Binding. The parameters of MLD multicast
static port binding are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-70.
2-98 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-70 MLD Multicast Static Port Binding Configuration Window
2. Select one MVLAN from the MVLAN list, select the group IP, and specify the port to
bind the multicast service.
3. Click New to open the Create Multicast Group Static Port Binding dialogue box.
4. Configure the group IP and source IP, and then click OK. Table 2-36 describes the
MLD multicast static port binding parameters.
Table 2-36 Description of MLD Multicast Static Port Binding Parameters
Parameter Description
Group IP Configure the IP address of the multicast group.
Source IP For the snooping mode, the source IP address is the source IP
address in the user report packets.
For the proxy mode, the source IP address is the host IP
address.
--end--
2.7.13 Querying MLD Active Multicast Group Information
This procedure introduces how to query the MLD active multicast group information of
the specified ONU or port. The information includes the MVLAN, group IP, source IP,
multicast group type, and multicast source filter mode.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example to query the multicast group information of the
specified DSL port.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-99
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD > Active Multicast Group, and the parameters to query the active multicast
group information are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-71.
Figure 2-71 MLD Active Multicast Group Information Query Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, and port to display the corresponding multicast
information.
--end--
2.7.14 Querying MLD Multicast information
This procedure introduces how to query the multicast information of the specified MLD,
including the active user number of the MVLAN.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Multicast > 
MLD > Interface Statistics, and the parameters to query the multicast active user
information are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-72.
2-100 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-72 MLD Multicast Information Query Information
2. Select an MVLAN in the left pane to query the corresponding group IP and active
user number.
--end--
2.8 QoS Management
2.8.1 Configuring Ethernet Queue Mapping
This procedure describes how to configure the mapping relations between the Ethernet
uplink port queues and the 802.1p priorities. The NE can allocate the packets of different
priorities on the uplink port to the specified queues according to the mapping relations.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Ethernet Queue Mapping. The mapping parameters are displayed on the right, see 
Figure 2-73.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-101
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-73 Ethernet Queue Mapping Configuration Window
2. Select a priority in the CoS Value column, and then modify its corresponding queue
ID in the Queue ID column. Table 2-37 describes the parameters.
Table 2-37 Description of Ethernet Queue Mapping Parameters
Parameter Description
CoS Value Class of Service or the service priority
Queue ID The NE uplink port supports eight output queues, with the queue ID 7
the highest service priority.
Range: 0 – 7
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
2.8.2 Configuring CFI Mapping
CFI stands for Canonical Format Indicator, which is a 1-bit field of the TCI field of the
Ethernet IEEE 802.1Q frames, and is used to indicate whether the MAC address is
encapsulated in standard format.
2-102 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
The NE supports the function to map the priority of the upstream packets based on
CFI value. In case of congestion, the packets with different CFI values are dropped
according to their different priority.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Context
If the CFI value of the Ethernet IEEE 802.1Q frames is 0, it indicates the MAC address
is encapsulated in standard format. If the value of the CFI field is 1, it indicates the MAC
address is encapsulated in non-standard format. The default value is 0.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
CFI Mapping Configuration, and the CFI mapping configuration parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-74.
Figure 2-74 CFI Mapping Configuration Window
2. Specify the priority from the CFI Dropping Precedence drop-down list, and then
click Set.
--end--
2.8.3 Configuring SCB Queue Mapping
This procedure introduces how to configure the mapping rules of the CoS queue in the 
SCB channel of the PON interface. Packets with different priority in the SCB channel
are assigned to the specified queue based on the mapping configuration. In case of
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-103
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
congestion, management signaling and media and voice service packets are sent with
higher priority.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Context
SCB technique is used to create a data transmission logic channel between OLT and 
ONU, and all the ONUs are allowed to legally receive the data from this channel. When
the system forwards the multicast service packets, even though more than one ONU
demands the same program, OLT only sends one copy of multicast media traffic data
in the SCB logic channel, and all the ONUs receive the same copy of the data, which
greatly saves the network broadband resources.
For the management convenience, There is only one SCB data transmission logic
channel in each PON interface, and all the multicast media packets are transmitted in
the same channel. VLAN ID is used to distinguish, label, and separate the traffic.
SCB data transmission logic channel is unidirectional channel (Only downstream), used
to transmit downstream packets. Upstream multicast protocol packets are transmitted in
the unicast channel.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol manager window, choose QoS > 
SCB Queue Mapping, and the SCB queue mapping configuration parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-75.
2-104 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-75 SCB Queue Mapping Configuration Window
2. Select a priority in the CoS Value column, and then modify its corresponding queue
ID in theQueue ID column.
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
2.8.4 Profiles
The NE supports the following QoS profiles:
 Traffic profile
 ATM traffic profile
 CoS to CoS profile
 Queue block profile
 Queue mapping profile
 DSCP to DSCP profile
 DSCP to CoS mapping profile
 DSCP to drop priority mapping profile
 CoS to MPLS TC mapping profile
 MPLS TC to CoS mapping profile
 Queue WRED profile
2.8.4.1 Configuring a Traffic Profile
This procedure describes how to configure a traffic profile for the IP packets.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-105
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
The traffic profile can be used on the following ports to limit the packet traffic.
 GPON OLT port
 GPON ONU virtual port
 xDSL PVC port
 xDSL port
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > Traffic Profile. The profile parameters are displayed on the right, see 
Figure 2-76.
Figure 2-76 Traffic Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list, enter the profile name in the Profile Name text
box, and then configure the traffic profile parameters. Table 2-38 describes the
parameters.
2-106 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Table 2-38 Description of Traffic Profile Parameters
Parameter Description
CIR (kbps) The committed information rate of the allowed traffic
CIR CoS Priority Remark The CoS priority added to the subscriber service traffic that is
within the CIR range
CBS (KB) The committed burst size, which should be larger than the
maximum packet length
PIR (kbps) The peak information rate of the allowed traffic, which should
be larger than or equal to the CIR value
PIR CoS Priority Remark The CoS priority added to the subscriber service traffic that is
within the PIR range
PBS (KB) The peak burst size, which should be larger than or equal to
the CBS value
Discard Mode The mode to discard the packets in case of network traffic
congestion, including:
 No Distinction: The packets are discarded according to
the sequence that they are added to the queue.
 Low Priority First: The packets are discarded according to
the CoS priority.
Color Mode The system processes the packets based on certain rules,
and marks the packets with colors. The packets marked with
different colors (red, yellow, and green) are processed in the
following modes.
 Color-aware: The NE processes and forwards the packets
marked with colors.
The packets marked with red color are discarded. Some
packets marked with yellow color are discarded. All the
packets marked with green color are forwarded.
 Color-blind: The NE forwards all the packets no matter
what color the packets are marked with.
3. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple
NEs in batches
1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles dialogue
box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-107
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click , and then
click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles window, select
the NEs, and configure the starting time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to the
selected NEs at the specified starting time.
Delete a profile from multiple
NEs in batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles dialogue
box .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click , and then
click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles window, select
the NEs, and configure the starting time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile from the
selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.4.2 Configuring an ATM Traffic Profile
This procedure describes how to configure an ATM traffic profiles.
This profile is used in the ATM scenarios with strict service priority classification. It can
be applied to the DSL PVC port to limit the ATM traffic.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > ATM Traffic Profile. The profile parameters are displayed on the right,
see Figure 2-77.
2-108 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-77 ATM Traffic Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list, enter the profile name in the Profile Name text box,
and then configure the ATM traffic profile parameters. Table 2-39 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-39 Description of ATM Traffic Profile Parameters
Parameter Description
Profile Type  ATM CBR: The packets are transmitted at a constant rate. It is
applicable for high-priority services, such as the voice service.
 ATM UBR: The system makes its effort to transmit packets. It is
applicable for low-priority services, such as the data service.
 ATM VBR: The packet transmission bit rate is variable. It is
applicable for high-priority services, such as the video service.
PCR (kbps) Peak cell rate
PCR CoS Priority Remark The CoS priority added to the subscriber service traffic that is within
the PCR range
MCR Minimum cell rate
MCR CoS Priority
Remark
The CoS priority added to the subscriber service traffic that is within
the MCR range.
SCR Sustainable cell rate.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-109
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
SCR CoS Priority Remark The CoS priority added to the subscriber service traffic that is within
the SCR range.
Discard Mode The mode to discard the packets in case of network traffic
congestion, including:
 No Distinction: The packets are discarded according to the
sequence that they are added to the queue.
 Low Priority First: The packets are discarded according to the
CoS priority.
3. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to
the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile
from the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.4.3 Configuring a CoS to CoS Profiles
This procedure describes how to configure a CoS remark profiles, which are used to
modify the CoS value of the packets based on their original CoS values.
The CoS to CoS profile can be applied to the GPON ONU virtual port and xDSL PVC
port.
2-110 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Context
_DEFAULT_COS_TO_COS_PROFILE is the system default CoS to CoS profile. It
cannot be modified or deleted.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > CoS to CoS Profile. The profile parameters are displayed on the right,
see Figure 2-78.
Figure 2-78 CoS to CoS Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list, enter the profile name in the Profile Name text box.
3. Select a priority in the CoS to CoS Priority column, andthen modify its
corresponding CoS value in the CoS to CoS Value column.
4. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-111
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to
the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile
from the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.4.4 Configuring a Queue Block Profile
This procedure describes how to configure a queue parameter profiles, which are used
to configure the service queue count, queue scheduling mode, and queue depth.
The queue block profile is applied to the following ports.
 Ethernet port
 GPON OLT port
 xDSL port
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Context
_DEFAULT_QUEUE_BLOCK_PROFILE is the system default queue parameter profile.
It cannot be modified or deleted. By default, a port supports eight queues with the queue
weight of 0 and queue depth of 0.
The NE supports three queue scheduling modes:
2-112 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
 Strict Priority (SP), default mode
The NE strictly follows the high-to-low priorities to send the groups in the higher-
priority queues first. When the higher-priority queues are empty, the NE sends the
groups in the lower-priority queues.
 Weighted Round Robin (WRR)
Each queue has a weight value. If there are eight queues, the weight values are 7–
1 from high to low. The weight value indicates the ratio of obtaining resources. This
mode ensures that each queue can get certain service time.
 SP+WRR
This mode is the combination of the previous two modes. Some queues use the SP
scheduling mode and some use the WRR scheduling mode. When the WRR value
is 0, the queue uses the SP scheduling mode. The queues using the SP scheduling
mode are higher-priority queues.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > Queue Block Profile. The queue block profile parameters are displayed
on the right, see Figure 2-79.
Figure 2-79 Queue Block Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list, and enter the profile name in the Profile Name text
box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-113
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
3. Select the queue number from the Queue Number drop-down list, select a queue
in the Queue column, and then modify its corresponding queue weight and queue
depth. Table 2-40 describes the parameters.
Table 2-40 Description of the Queue Block Parameters
Parameter Description
Queue Number Range: 2, 4, 8:
 2: Queues 0 and 1 are available.
 4: Queues 0 – 3 are available.
 8: Queues 0 – 7 are available.
Default: 8
Queue Weight Configure the ratio that a queue obtains resources. Weight 0 indicates
that the queue uses the SP scheduling mode.
If the port uses the SP+WRR scheduling mode, the SP priority is higher
than the WRR priority. The weight of the higher-priority queue is set to
be 0.
Queue Depth (2KB) Configure the queue buffer, used to handle burst traffic.
It is recommended to keep the default value 0.
4. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to
the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
2-114 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
To Do This
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile
from the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.4.5 Configuring a Queue Mapping Profile
This procedure describes how to configure a queue mapping profile, including the queue
cnumber and the packet enqueue mode. When the enqueue mode is Enqueue by
CoS, you need to configure the mapping relations between the port queues and 802.1
p priorities. The NE allocates the packets of different priorities to the specified queues
according to the mapping relations.
The queue mapping profile can be applied to the GPON OLT port and xDSL port.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example, and the default enqueue mode Enqueue by
CoS is used.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Context
_DEFAULT_QUEUE_MAP_PROFILE is the system default queue mapping profile.
It cannot be modified or deleted. By default, a port supports eight queues with the
enqueue mode of Enqueue by CoS.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > Queue Mapping Profile. The profile parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-80.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-115
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-80 Queue Mapping Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list and then enter the profile name in the Profile Name text
box.
3. Select a queue number from the Queue Number drop-down list, select a CoS value
in the CoS column, and then modify its corresponding queue mapping value in the 
Queue Mapping column. Table 2-41 describes the parameters.
Table 2-41 Description of Queue Mapping Parameters
Parameter Description
Queue Number Range: 2, 4, 8
Default: 8
Enqueue Mode Select the mode that packets enters the port queues.
 Enqueue by CoS
You need to configure the mapping relations between the port
queue and packet 802.1p priority.
 Enqueue by Service Type
 Enqueue by GEM Port
 Enqueue by PVC
CoS The class of service value of the packets to be assigned to the
queues
Queue Mapping The ID of the queue that the packets will be assigned to
2-116 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
 When Queue Number is 2, the queue ID ranges from 0 to 1,
whose priority is from low to high.
 When Queue Number is 4, the queue ID ranges from 0 to 3,
whose priority is from low to high.
 When Queue Number is 8, the queue ID ranges from 0 to 7,
whose priority is from low to high.
4. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to
the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialoguebox .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile
from the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.4.6 Configuring a DSCP to DSCP Profile
This procedure describes how to configure a DSCP) to DSCP profile.
The DSCP to DSCP profile can be applied to the Ethernet port to modify the DSCP
value of the packet according to its original DSCP value.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-117
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Context
_DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_DSCP_PROFILE is the system default DSCP to DSCP profile. It
cannot be modified or deleted.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > DSCP to DSCP Profile. The profile parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-81.
Figure 2-81 SCP to DSCP Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list, and enter the profile name in the Profile Name text
box.
3. Select a DSCP priority in the DSCP Priority column, and then modify its
corresponding DSCP value in the DSCP to DSCP Value column.
 Note
You can click Batch Modify to modify the DSCP priority in batches.
4. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
2-118 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to
the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile
from the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.4.7 Configuring a DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile
This procedure describes how to configure a DSCP to CoS mapping profile to modify
the CoS priority of the packet according to its DSCP priority.
This profile can be applied to the following ports.
 Ethernet port
 GPON ONU virtual port
 xDSL PVC port
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-119
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Context
_DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_COS_PROFILE is the system default DSCP to CoS mapping
profile. It cannot be modified or deleted. Table 2-42 describes the default mapping
relation between the DSCP priority and CoS priority.
Table 2-42 Default Mapping Relation Between DSCP Priority and CoS Priority
DSCP Priority CoS Priority
0–7 0
8–15 1
16–23 2
24–31 3
32–39 4
40–47 5
48–55 6
56–63 7
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile. The profile parameters are displayed on
the right, see Figure 2-82.
2-120 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-82 DSCP to CoS Mapping Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list, and enter the profile name in the Profile Name text
box.
3. Select a DSCP priority in the DSCP Priority column, and then modify its
corresponding CoS priority in the CoS Priority column.
 Note
You can click Batch Modify to modify the CoS priorities in batches.
4. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-121
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to
the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile
from the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.4.8 Configuring a DSCP to Drop Priority Mapping Profile
This procedure describes how to configure a DSCP to drop priority mapping profile.
The DSCP to drop priority mapping profile can be applied to the Ethernet port to modify
the drop priority of the packet according to its DSCP priority.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Context
Drop priority is used as a reference for dropping packets during queue scheduling.
It ranges from 0 to 2, with the dropping priority from low to high. In case of network
congestion, the packets with highest drop priority 2 are dropped first, and the packets
with the lowest drop priority 0 are dropped at last.
_DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_DROP_PROFILE is the system default DSCP to drop priority
mapping profile. It cannot be modified or deleted. By default, the drop priority of DSCP 0
– 63 is 0.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > DSCP to Drop Priority Mapping Profile. The profile parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-83.
2-122 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-83 DSCP to Drop Priority Mapping Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list, and enter the profile name in the Profile Name text
box.
3. Select a DSCP priority in the DSCP Priority column, and then modify its
corresponding dropping priority in the Dropping Priority column.
 Note
You can click Batch Modify to modify the drop priority in batches.
4. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to
the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-123
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile
from the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.4.9 Configuring CoS to MPLS TC Mapping Profile
This procedure describes how to configure the CoS to MPLS TC mapping profile.
This profile is used to map the relationship between the MPLS TC and CoS. The TC or 
EXP in the MPLS is used for traffic queue scheduling and packet discarding.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the navigationtree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > Profiles
> CoS to MPLS TC Mapping Profile. The profile parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-84.
2-124 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-84 CoS to MPLS TC Mapping Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list and enter the profile name in the Profile Name text box.
3. Select one CoS value and specify the corresponding TC value from the TC Value
column.
4. Click Apply.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Delete a profile Select the profile, and then click Delete.
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply. The Batch Apply
Profiles dialogue box is displayed.
2. Select a profile, click , and then click 
Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation–Batch Apply
Profiles window, select then NEs, and then
click Start. The profile is applied to the NEs in
batches.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Delete. The Batch Delete
Profiles dialogue box is displayed.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-125
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
2. Select a profile, click , and then click 
Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation–Batch Delete
Profiles window, select the NEs, and then
click Start. The profile is deleted from the NEs
in batches.
2.8.4.10 Configuring MPLS TC to CoS Mapping Profile
This procedure describes how to configure the MPLS TC to CoS mapping profile.
This profile is used to map the relationship between the MPLS TC and CoS. The TC or 
EXP in the MPLS is used for traffic queue scheduling and packet discarding.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > Profiles
> MPLS TC to CoS Mapping Profile. The profile parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-85.
Figure 2-85 MPLS TC to CoS Mapping Profile Configuration Window
2-126 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
2. Select New in the profile list, and enter the profile name in the Profile Name text
box.
3. Select one TC value and specify the corresponding CoS value from the CoS Priority
column.
4. Click Apply.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Delete a profile Select the profile, and then click Delete.
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply. The Batch Apply
Profiles dialogue box is displayed.
2. Select a profile, click , and then click 
Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation–Batch Apply
Profiles window, select then NEs, and then
click Start. The profile is applied to the NEs in
batches.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Delete. The Batch Delete
Profiles dialogue box is displayed.
2. Select a profile, click , and then click 
Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation–Batch Delete
Profiles window, select the NEs, and then
click Start. The profile is deleted from the NEs
in batches.
2.8.4.11 Configuring a Queue WRED Profile
Because of the bandwidth limit of uplink ports, some measurements are taken to
avoid the traffic congestion, including random early detection, weighted random early
detection, and tail discard.
This procedure describes how to configure weighted random early detection for the
packets colored by the system, and Configure the threshold and drop possibility for
the queues. In case of network congestion, the system discards the packets marked
with colors according to the threshold values and dropping possibility, to prevent all the
packets from getting lost owing to the output queue limits.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-127
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > 
Profiles > Queue WRED Profile. The parameters to configure the queue WRED
profiles are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-86.
Figure 2-86 Queue WRED Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the profile list, enter the profile name in the Profile Name text box,
and then configure the WRED profile parameters. Table 2-43 describes the queue
WRED profile parameters.
Table 2-43 Description of Queue WRED Profile Parameters
Parameter Description
Red Packet Lower Threshold Configure the lower threshold value for the red packets in the
specified queue.
If the percentage of the total red packets in the queue is
below the lower threshold value, the red packets will not be
discarded.
If the percentage of the total red packets in the queue is
above the lower threshold value, the red packets will be
discarded randomly.
2-128 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Generally speaking, the lower threshold of the red packets is
set to be the lowest among all the packets.
Red Packet Maximum Dropping
Probability
Configure the maximum dropping probability for the red
packets.
Yellow Packet Lower Threshold Configure the lower threshold value for the yellow packets in
the specified queue.
If the percentage of the total yellow packets in the queue is
below the lower threshold value, the yellow packets will not
be discarded.
If the percentage of the total yellow packets in the queue is
above the lower threshold value, the yellow packets will be
discarded randomly.
Yellow Packet Maximum Dropping
Probability
Configure the maximum dropping probability for the yellow
packets.
Green Packet Lower Threshold Configure the lower threshold value for the green packets in
the specified queue.
If the percentage of the total green packets in the queue is
below the lower threshold value, the green packets will not
be discarded.
If the percentage of the total green packets in the queue is
above the lower threshold value, the green packets will be
discarded randomly.
Generally speaking, the lower threshold of the green packets
is set to be the highest among all the packets.
Green Packet Maximum Dropping
Probability
Configure the maximum dropping probability for the green
packets.
3. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a profile to multiple NEs in batches 1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Apply Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-129
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
4. Click Start, and the system starts to apply the profile to
the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
Delete a profile from multiple NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box .
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles area, click
, and then click Apply.
3. In the Batch Operation – Batch Delete Profiles
window, select the NEs, and configure the starting
time.
4. Click Start, and the system starts to delete the profile
from the selected NEs at the specified starting time.
2.8.5 Port QoS Configuration
Port QoS configuration includes the following:
 Configuring Ethernet port QoS parameters
 Configuring OLT PON port QoS parameters
 Configuring DSL PVC QoS parameters (C300M)
 Configuring DSL PVC QoS parameters (C300M v4)
 Configuring DSL Port QoS parameters
 Configuring DSL queue QoS parameters
 Configuring GPON Virtual port QoS parameters
 Querying PON Vport traffic statistics information
2.8.5.1 Configuring Ethernet Port QoS Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the QoS parameters of the Ethernet port to
ensure the port service quality. The QoS parameters includes priority remarking, queue
scheduling, and egress shaping.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager windowis open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > Port
QoS > Ethernet Port. The port QoS parameters are displayed on the right, see 
Figure 2-87.
2-130 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-87 Ethernet Port QoS Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, and slot of the card.
3. In the port list, select a port, and then click Modify to open the Ethernet Port QoS
Configuration dialogue box.
4. Configure the QoS parameters. Table 2-44 describes the parameters.
Table 2-44 Description of Ethernet Port QoS Parameters
Parameter Description
Trust Mode  CoS: Remark the packet priority based on the packet CoS
priority on the Ethernet port side.
 DSCP: Remark the packet priority based on the packet DSCP
priority on the Ethernet port side.
Default: CoS
Default CoS Default CoS priority
The upstream untagged packet will be marked with the default
CoS priority at the Ethernet port side.
Default: 0
DSCP to CoS Mapping Modify the CoS priority of the packet based on the DSCP to CoS
mapping profile.
This parameter is effective when Trust Mode is set to be DSCP.
Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_COS_PROFILE
DSCP to DSCP Profile Modify the DSCP priority of the packet based on the DSCP to
DSCP profile.
This parameter is effective when Trust Mode is set to be DSCP.
Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_DSCP_PROFILE
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-131
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
DSCP to Dropping Priority
Mapping
Modify the dropping priority based on the DSCP to dropping
priority mapping profile.
This parameter is effective when Trust Mode is set to be DSCP.
Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_DROP_PROFILE
Queue Block Configure the queue block profile to be applied to the Ethernet
port.
Default: _DEFAULT_QUEUE_BLOCK_PROFILE
Limit Select the option to configure the shaping rate limit and shaping
burst size.
Shaping Rate Limited (kbps) Maximum information rate
Shaping Burst Size (KB) Maximum burst size
5. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.8.5.2 Configuring OLT PON Port QoS Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the QoS parameters for the OLT PON port to
ensure the port service quality.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > Port
QoS > OLT PON Port. The port QoS parameters are displayed on the right, see 
Figure 2-88.
2-132 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-88 OLT PON Port QoS Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, and slot of the card.
3. In the port list, select a port, and then click Modify to open the OLT PON QoS
Configuration dialogue box.
4. Configure the QoS parameters. Table 2-45 describes the parameters.
Table 2-45 Description of OLT PON Port QoS Parameters
Parameter Description
Queue Block Configure the queue block profile to be applied to the port.
Default: _DEFAULT_QUEUE_BLOCK_PROFILE
Queue Mapping Configure the queue mapping profile to be applied to the port.
Default: _DEFAULT_QUEUE_MAP_PROFILE
Egress  No Limit: The port outbound traffic rate is not limited.
 Limit: limit the port outbound traffic rate according to the traffic
profile.
Default: No Limit
5. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.8.5.3 Configuring DSL PVC QoS Parameters (C300M v4)
This procedure describes how to configure the QoS parameters of a DSL PVC port to
ensure the port service quality.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-133
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > Port
QoS > DSL PVC. The DSL PVC QoS parameters are displayed on the right, see 
Figure 2-89.
Figure 2-89 DSL PVC QoS Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and PVC.
3. In the PVC list, click Modify to open the DSL PVC QoS Configuration dialogue box,
see Figure 2-90.
2-134 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-90 DSL PVC QoS Configuration Dialogue Box
4. Configure the PVC QoS parameters. Table 2-46 describes the parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-135
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 2-46 Descriptions of DSL PVC QoS Parameters
Parameter Description
CoS Filter  Enable: If the CoS priority of the packets is consistent with the
default port PVC CoS priority, the packets are allowed to pass.
If not, the packets are discarded.
 Disable: Disable the CoS filter function.
Default: Disable
Trust Mode  CoS: Use the default port PVC CoS to override or the CoS to
CoS profile to remark the packet CoS priority.
 DSCP: Use the DSCP to CoS profile to remark the packet CoS
priority.
Default: CoS
Ingress CoS Remarking Remark the outer CoS priority of the inbound packets.
Ingress Inner CoS
Remarking
Remark the inner CoS priority of the inbound packets.
Override with Default CoS This parameter is effective when Trust Mode is set to be CoS.
 Enable: For the untagged packets, mark the packet CoS priority
with the default port PVC CoS priority.
For the tagged packets, override the packet CoS priority with
the default port PVC CoS priority.
 Disable: Use the CoS to CoS profile to modify the packet CoS
priority.
Default CoS Configure the default port PVC CoS priority.
Default: 0
CoS to CoS Profile Select the CoS to CoS profile to be applied to the PVC, and modify
the CoS priority of the packets based on the profile.
The parameter is effective when the Trust Mode is set to be CoS
and Override with Default CoS is set to be Disable.
Default: _DEFAULT_COS_TO_COS_PROFILE
DSCP to CoS Mapping Select the DSCP to CoS profile to be applied to the PVC, and
modify the CoS priority of the packet based on the profile.
The parameter is effective when the Trust Mode is set to be 
DSCP.
Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_COS_PROFILE
Ingress Limit the traffic rate in the PVC inbound direction.
 No Limit: The PVC inbound traffic rate is not limited.
 Limit: Select the traffic profile to limit the PVC inbound traffic
rate.
Default: No Limit
2-136 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Egress Limit the traffic rate in the PVC outbound direction.
 No Limit: The PVC outbound traffic rate is not limited.
 Limit: Select the traffic profile to limit the PVC outbound traffic
rate.
Default: No Limit
5. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.8.5.4 Configuring DSL Port QoS Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the QoS parameters of a DSL port to ensure
the port service quality.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > Port
QoS > DSL Port. The port QoS parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure
2-91.
Figure 2-91 DSL Port QoS Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, and slot.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-137
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
3. Configure the queue profiles to be applied to the port.
a. In the port list, select a port, and then click Set to open the Port QoS
Configuration dialogue box.
b. Select the queue block file and queue mapping profile. Table 2-47 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-47 Description of DSL QoS Parameters
Parameter Description
Queue Block Select the queue block profile to be applied to the port.
Default: _DEFAULT_QUEUE_BLOCK_PROFILE
Queue Mapping Select the queue mapping profile to be applied to the port.
Default: _DEFAULT_QUEUE_MAP_PROFILE
c. After the configuration, click Set.
4. Configure the port VLAN trafficparameters to limit the traffic rate for the specified
VLAN.
 Note
The DSL port uses the VLAN to identify services. For example, VLAN 2 bears
the voice service, VLAN 3 bears the IPTV service, and VLAN 4 bears the Internet
service. You can limit the VLAN rate to limit the service rate.
a. In the port list, select one port and then click Port VLAN Traffic Profile to open
the Port VLAN Traffic Profile dialogue box.
b. Click New to open the Port VLAN Traffic Profile dialogue box.
c. Configure the port VLAN traffic parameters. Table 2-48 describes the parameters.
Table 2-48 Description of Port VLAN Traffic Parameters
Parameter Description
SVLAN Outer VLAN ID of the service traffic
CVLAN Inner VLAN ID of the service traffic
Direction  Ingress: Limit the upstream traffic rate .
 Egress: Limit the downstream traffic rate.
Traffic Profile Select the traffic profile applied to the port
d. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2-138 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
2.8.5.5 Configuring DSL Queue QoS Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the DSL queue QoS parameters to control
the packet limitation by QoS queue.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The DSL card is online and working properly.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > Port
QoS > DSL Queue. The DSL queue QoS parameters are displayed on the right,
see Figure 2-92.
Figure 2-92 DSL Queue Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot and port.
3. In the queue list, select a queue item, and then click Modify to open the Modify DSL
Queue dialogue box.
4. Configure the DSL queue parameters. Table 2-49 describes the parameters.
Table 2-49 Description of DSL Queue Parameters
Parameter Description
Egress  No Limit: By default, it is no limit for the queue.
 Limit: Select the a traffic profile to limit the queue.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-139
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
--end--
2.8.5.6 Configuring GPON Virtual Port QoS Parameters
This procedure describes how to configure the GPON VPort QoS parameters to ensure
the port service quality.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose QoS > Port
QoS > GPON Vport. The port QoS parameters are displayed on the right, see 
Figure 2-93.
Figure 2-93 GPON VPort QoS Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU.
3. In the VPort list, select a virtual port, and then click Modify to open the GPON VPort
QoS Configuration dialogue box.
4. Configure the VPort QoS parameters. Table 2-50 describes the parameters.
2-140 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Table 2-50 Descriptions of GPON VPort QoS Parameters
Parameter Description
CoS Filter  Enable: If the CoS priority of the packets is consistent with the
default VPort CoS priority, the packets are allowed to pass. If
not, the packets are discarded.
 Disable: Disable the CoS filter function.
Default: Disable
Trust Mode  CoS: Use the default CoS to override or the CoS to CoS profile
to remark the packet CoS priority.
 DSCP: Use the DSCP to CoS profile to remark the packet CoS
priority.
Default: CoS
Ingress CoS Remarking Remark the CoS priority of the VPort inbound packets.
Egress CoS Marking Remark the CoS priority of the VPort outbound packets.
Override with Default CoS This parameter is effective when Trust Mode is set to be CoS.
 Enable: For the untagged packets, mark the packet CoS priority
with the VPort default CoS priority.
For the tagged packets, override the packet CoS priority with
the VPort default CoS priority.
 Disable: Use the CoS to CoS profile to modify the packet CoS
priority.
Default CoS Configure the default VPort CoS priority.
Default: 0
CoS to CoS Profile Select the CoS to CoS profile to be applied to the VPort, and
modify the CoS priority of the packets based on the profile.
The parameter is effective when Trust Mode is set to CoS and 
Override with Default CoS is set to be Disable.
Default: _DEFAULT_COS_TO_COS_PROFILE
DSCP to CoS Mapping Select the DSCP to CoS profile to be applied to the VPort, and
modify the CoS priority of the packet based on the profile.
The parameter is effective when the Trust Mode is set to be 
DSCP.
Default: _DEFAULT_DSCP_TO_COS_PROFILE
CoS to CoS Profile (Inner
Profile)
Select the CoS to CoS profile to be applied to the VPort, and
modify the inner CoS priority of the packets based on the profile.
The parameter is effective when the Trust Mode is set to be CoS
and Override with Default CoS is set to be Disable.
Default: _DEFAULT_COS_TO_COS_PROFILE
Ingress Limit the traffic rate in the VPort inbound direction.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-141
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
 No Limit: The VPort inbound traffic rate is not limited.
 Limit: Select the traffic profile to limit the VPort inbound traffic
rate.
Default: No Limit
Egress Limit the traffic rate in the VPort outbound direction.
 No Limit: The VPort outbound traffic rate is not limited.
 Limit: Select the traffic profile to limit the VPort outbound traffic
rate.
Default: No Limit
Queue Block Select the queue block profile to be applied to the VPort.
Queue Mapping Select the queue mapping profile to be applied to the VPort.
5. After the configuration, click Set.
--end--
2.9 DHCP Snooping
2.9.1 Configuring DHCP Snooping Function
This procedure describes how to configure the DHCP snooping function, which is used
to set up or maintain a DHCP snooping table, and filter those untrusted DHCP packets.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Context
DHCP snooping enhances network security. It provides the following functions.
 Setting an untrusted port
This port is connected to a computer or a network printer. An untrusted port can only
forward the DHCP request packets from the user port and discards other DHCP
packets from the user port. In addition, the untrusted port compares the source
MAC address of the DHCP request packets with the physical address of the DHCP
client. Only when the two addresses are the same, the packets will be forwarded.
Otherwise, the packets will be discarded.
 Setting a trusted port
2-142 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
The trusted port can receive all the DHCP packets. When the port connected to the
legal DHCP server is set to be a trusted port and other ports are set to be untrusted
ports, it prevents the network from being attacked by false DHCP servers.
 Limiting the rate of the DHCP packets on the untrusted ports, which can prevents
broadcast attacks of the legal DHCP request packets
 Setting up a DHCP snooping binding table
Once a client connected to an untrusted port obtains a legal DHCP Offer packet,
the device adds a binding item to the DHCP snooping binding table, including the IP
address, MAC address, port number, VLAN ID, and lease period of the client that is
connected to the untrusted port.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCP Snooping Configuration. The DHCP snooping parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-94.
Figure 2-94 DHCP Snooping Configuration Window
2. Enable the global DHCP snooping function.
a. Click Global to open the DHCP Snooping Global Configuration dialogue box.
b. Select Enabled, and click OK.
3. Enable the DHCP snooping function for an uplink port.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-143
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
On the Uplink Port tab, select one uplink port, and then click Switch to set the
selectedport to a trusted port.
4. Enable the DHCP snooping function for a VLAN.
On the VLAN Parameters tab, select a user port VLAN, and then click Switch to
enable the DHCP snooping function for the VLAN.
5. Enable the DHCP snooping function for a user port.
a. On the User Port tab, select the rack, shelf, slot, port and PVC.
b. In the PVC list, select a PVC, and then click Modify to open the DHCP Snooping
User Port Configuration dialogue box.
c. Configure the user port DHCP snooping parameters. Table 2-51 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-51 Description of User Port DHCP Snooping Parameters
Parameter Description
Service Status  Enable: Enable the DHCP snooping function for the user port
PVC.
 Disable: Disable the DHCP snooping function for the user
port PVC.
Quota Maximum DHCP sessions supported by the user port PVC
d. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.9.2 Querying DHCP Snooping Online User Information
This procedure describes how to query the information of DHCP snooping online users,
including the their IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCP Snooping Online Users. And the system shows the binding
relation between the IP address and MAC address of the DHCP snooping online
users, see Figure 2-95.
2-144 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-95 DHCP Snooping Online User Window
2. (Optional) Click Refresh to display the latest information.
--end--
2.9.3 Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Global Function
This procedure introduces how to enable the DHCPv4 snooping global function. After
the DHCPv4 snooping function is enabled, the NE builds and maintains the DHCPv4
snooping binding table, and filters untrusted DHCPv4 packets.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv4 Snooping Global Configuration. The parameters to enable
the DHCPv4 function are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-96.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-145
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-96 DHCPv4 Snooping Global Parameter Configuration Window
2. Select Enabled from the DHCPv4 Enabling drop-down list.
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
2.9.4 Configuring DHCPv4 Snooping VLAN
This procedure introduces how to configure the DHCPv4 snooping VLAN, and enable
the DHCPv4 snooping function of all the ports of the specified VLAN.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The global DHCPv4 snooping function is enabled. About the configuration, see 2.9.3
Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Global Function.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv4 Snooping VLAN Configuration. The DHCPv4 snooping
VLAN configuration parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-97.
2-146 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-97 DHCPv4 Snooping VLAN Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add VLAN Configuration dialogue box.
3. Configure the VLAN ID, and then click OK.
--end--
2.9.5 Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Port Function
This procedure introduces how to enable the DHCPv4 snooping function for the
specified port.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The DHCPv4 snooping global function is enabled. About the configuration, see 2.9.3
Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Global Function.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv4 Snooping Port Configuration. The DHCPv4 snooping port
configuration parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-98.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-147
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-98 DHCPv4 Snooping Port Configuration Window
2. Specify the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU.
3. Select a VPort in the VPort list, and then click Modify to open the Modify DHCPv4
Snooping Port Configuration dialogue box.
4. Select Enabled from the Port Enabling drop-down list, and then click OK.
--end--
2.9.6 Limiting DHCPv4 Snooping Sessions
This procedure introduces how to limit DHCPv4 snooping sessions. This function
is used to limit the maximum number of the DHCPv4 clients that the specified port
supports.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The DHCPv4 snooping global function is enabled. About the configuration, see 2.9.3
Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Global Function.
2-148 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv4 Snooping Session Limitation. The parameters to limit the
DHCPv4 snooping sessions are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-99.
Figure 2-99 DHCPv4 Snooping Session Limitation Configuration Window
2. Specify the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU.
3. Select a VPort in the VPort list, and then click Modify to open the Modify Session
Limitation Configuration dialogue box.
4. Select the Session Limitation check box, and enter the maximum number in the
text box to limit the DHCPv4 client number.
5. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.9.7 Querying DHCPv4 Snooping Online User Information
This procedure introduces how to query the information of DHCPv4 snooping online
users, including the MAC address, VLAN, IP address, and lease time.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-149
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
 The global DHCPv4 Snooping function is enabled. About the global DHCPv4
Snooping function configuration, see 2.9.3 Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Global
Function.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv4 Snooping Online Users. The online user information is
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-100.
Figure 2-100 DHCPv4 Snooping Online User Information
2. (Optional) Select one user, and click Delete to manually delete that online user
information from the DHCPv4 Snooping binding table.
--end--
2.9.8 Configuring DHCPv4 Snooping MAC-anti-spoofing Function
This procedure introduces how to configure the MAC anti-spoofing function for the
specified VLAN. If the system detects the packets of the specified VLAN have the same
source MAC address, and meanwhile the packets are sent by different interfaces,
the packets that are received first are forwarded, and the packets that are received
sequently are discarded.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
2-150 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Prerequisite
DHCPv4 snooping function is enabled. About the DHCPv4 snooping function enabling,
see 2.9.3 Enabling DHCPv4 Snooping Global Function.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv4 Snooping MAC-anti-spoofing, and the DHCPv4 snooping
MAC-anti-spoofing parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-101.
Figure 2-101 DHCPv4 Snooping MAC-anti-Spoofing Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Adding MAC-anti-spoofing Configuration dialogue box.
3. Configure the VLAN for the MAC anti-spoofing function, and then click OK.
--end--
2.9.9 Configuring DHCP Snooping IP Static Binding Information
Once a client connected to an untrusted port obtains a legal DHCP offer, the equipment
automatically adds a binding entry to the DHCP snooping binding table. This DHCP
snoopingentry contains the client IP address, MAC address, port number, VLAN ID, and
lease of the untrusted port.
This procedure describes how to manually add a binding entry to the DHCP snooping
table.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-151
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCP Snooping IP Static Binding, and the DHCP snooping IP static
binding parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-102.
Figure 2-102 DHCP Snooping IP Static Binding Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and PVC.
3. Click New to open the Add Static DHCP Snooping dialogue.
4. Configure the DHCP snooping IP Binding parameters, and then click OK.
--end--
2.9.10 Enabling DHCPv6 Snooping Global Function
This procedure introduces how to enable the DHCPv6 snooping global function. After
the DHCPv6 snooping function is enabled, the NE builds and maintains the DHCPv6
snooping binding table, and filters untrusted DHCPv6 packets.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
2-152 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv6 Snooping Global Configuration. The parameters to enabled
the DHCPv6 function are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-103.
Figure 2-103 DHCPv6 Snooping Global Parameter Configuration Window
2. Select Enabled from the DHCPv6 Enabling drop-down list.
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
2.9.11 Configuring DHCPv6 Snooping VLAN
This procedure introduces how to enable the DHCPv6 snooping function of the all the
ports in the specified VLAN.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The DHCPv6 snooping global function is enabled. About the configuration, see
2.9.10 Enabling DHCPv6 Snooping Global Function.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-153
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv6 Snooping VLAN Configuration. The DHCPv6 Snooping
VLAN configuration parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-104.
Figure 2-104 DHCPv6 Snooping VLAN Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add VLAN Configuration dialogue box.
3. Enter the VLAN ID in the text box, and then click OK.
--end--
2.9.12 Limiting DHCPv6 Snooping Sessions
This procedure introduces how to limit the DHCPv6 snooping sessions. This function
is used to limit the maximum number of the DHCPv6 clients that the specified port
supports.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
2-154 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
 The DHCPv6 snooping global function is enabled. About the configuration, see
2.9.10 Enabling DHCPv6 Snooping Global Function.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv6 Snooping Session Limitation. The configuration parameters
to limit the DHCPv6 snooping sessions are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-105.
Figure 2-105 DHCPv6 Snooping Session Limitation Configuration Window
2. Specify the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU.
3. Select A VPort in the VPort list, and then click Modify to open the Modify Session
Limitation Configuration dialogue box.
4. Select the Session Limitation check box, and enter the maximum number in the
text box to limit the DHCPv6 client number.
5. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-155
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
2.9.13 Querying DHCPv6 Snooping Online User Information
This procedure introduces how to query the DHCPv6 snooping online user Information,
including the MAC address, IP Address, lease time, VLAN, and others.
ZXA10 C300 v2 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The DHCPv6 snooping global function is enabled. About the configuration, see
2.9.10 Enabling DHCPv6 Snooping Global Function.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, Choose DHCP
Snooping > DHCPv6 Snooping Online User. The DHCPv6 snooping online user
information is displayed on the right, see Figure 2-106.
Figure 2-106 DHCPv6 Snooping Online User Information
2. (Optional) Select one user, and click Delete to manually delete that online user
information from the DHCPv6 snooping binding table.
--end--
2.10 Port Location
2-156 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
2.10.1 Configuring Port Identification Function
NMS supports the port identification function, which is used to authenticate the
subscriber and prevent the illegal users' access.
PPPoE Plus is used to authenticate and identify the PPPoE dial-up subscribers. DHCP
Option 82 is used to authenticate and identify the subscribers that dynamically apply for
IP addresses.
This procedure introduces how to configure the DHCP option82 or PPPoE plus for the
port identification function.
ZXA10 C300 is used as an example.
Context
 PPPoE Plus Principle
Figure 2-107 shows the PPPoE Plus principles.
Figure 2-107 PPPoE Plus Principle
PADI: PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation PADO: PPPoE Active Discovery Offer
PADR: PPPoE Active Discovery Request PADS: PPPoE Active Discovery Session-
Confirmation
PADT: PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate PPPoE: Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet
LCP: Link Control Protocol NCP: Network Control Protocol
The PPPoE Intermediate Agent intercepts all the PPPoE Discovery packets,
including PADI, PADO, PADR, PADS, and PADT packets.
The PPPoE Intermediate Agent performs the following functions.
→ Adding the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to the upstream PPPoE Discovery
packets, that is, the PADI and PADR packets
→ Removing the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID from the downstream PPPoE
Discovery packets, that is, the PADO and PADS packets
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-157
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
If a PADI or PADR packet exceeds 1500 bytes after being added with the DSL circuit
ID, the PPPoE Intermediate Agent does not need to send the modified data packet to
the broadband gateway, but sends the response packet (PADO or PADS packet) with
the Generic-Error tag to the PPPoE client.
 DHCP Option 82 Principle
Figure 2-108 shows the DHCP Option 82 principles.
Figure 2-108 DHCP Option 82 Principle
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
The DHCP Relay Agent intercepts the broadcast packets that the client sends to
the DHCP server, including the DHCP Discover, DHCP Offer, DHCP Request, and
DHCP Inform packets.
The DHCP Relay Agent performs the following functions.
→ Adding the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to the upstream DHCP broadcast packets
that are received from the client
→ Removing the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID from the downstream reply packets
that are sent by the DHCP Server
→ Forwarding the valid broadcast packets with the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID that
are sent by other DHCP Relay Agents
If a DHCP broadcast packet exceeds the maximum packet length after being added
with the Agent option, the DHCP Relay Agent will discard the packet directly and
increase the error count.
Steps
Selecting the port for the port identification configuration
2. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Port
Identification. The port identification configuration parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-109.
2-158 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-109Port Identification Configuration Window
3. Select the rack, shelf, slot, port, and ONU to select the user port to configure the port
identification function.
Configuring the port identification global parameters
5. On the General tab, click Global to open the General Global Configuration
dialogue box.
6. Configure the parameters. Table 2-52 describes the port identification global
parameters.
Table 2-52 Description of Port Identification Global Parameters
Parameter Description
Node Name Configure the node name when Node ID Type is set to be Node
Name.
Node ID Type The circuit ID identifies the subscriber line and subscriber physical
location.
This parameter refers to the access-node-identifier type in the circuit
ID.
 Inband MAC: Use the NE in-band MAC address as the access-
node-identifier type.
 Node Name: Use the NE node name as the access-node-
identifier type.
Rack Configure the rack number in the circuit ID.
Shelf Configure the shelf number in the circuit ID.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-159
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
Circuit ID Syntax Enabling Configure whether to use the flexible circuit ID syntax.
If this function is enabled, the keywords in the circuit ID can be
selected and combined flexibly.
The circuit ID syntax for each access node is unique.
7. After the configuration, click OK.
Configuring the circuit ID syntax
9. On the General tab, click Circuit ID Syntax to open the Circuit ID Syntax dialogue
box.
 Note
When the circuit ID syntax function is enabled, you can customize the circuit ID
syntax. The NE obtains the variable domain values according to their configuration
sequence and generates the circuit ID, which includes the separator and output
width. The circuit ID information is added to the PPPoE plus or DHCP packets, and
used for network authentication and prevention of the illegal users' access.
10.Click New to open the Add Circuit ID Component dialogue box.
11. Configure the circuit ID parameters. Table 2-53 describes the circuit ID parameters.
Table 2-53 Description of Circuit ID Component Parameters
Parameter Description
Component Index Used to identify the variable domains and their locations in the Circuit
ID syntax.
Component Type  Standard Variable: All the variable domains defined in the TR101
standard
 Extended Variable: Self-defined variable domains, supporting
ONU-ID, GEM Port, SVLAN, CVLAN, SN, LOID, and LOID
Password
 Separator: Used to separate the keywords
 User Defined String: Specify the user customized strings.
Component Content Configure the component content of each variable domain.
Component Width Configure the output width of each variable domain.
The circuit ID domain cannot exceed 63 characters. If the length
exceeds 63 characters, the NE intercepts the first 63 characters and
generates an alarm.
12.After configuring one circuit ID component, click OK.
2-160 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
13.(Optional) In the Circuit ID Syntax dialogue box, click New to add another circuit ID
component.
Configuring the remote ID
15.On the General tab, select the location to configure the remote ID, and then click 
Modify to open the General Configuration dialogue box.
 Note
When the circuit ID information is not enough to identify one subscriber line, remote
ID is used. The remote ID information is appended to the circuit ID information for the
port identification purpose.
16.Configure the remote ID parameters. Table 2-54 describes the remote ID
parameters.
Table 2-54 Description of Remote ID Parameters
Parameter Description
Format Select the circuit ID format for the user port.
Remote ID Enabling When the Circuit ID cannot identify a subscriber line uniquely, the
remote ID is used as a supplementary to identify the subscriber line.
Remote ID Used to identify the remote host of a circuit port.
The Remote ID can be any string that does not exceed 63
characters.
Circuit ID In most cases, it is not necessary to configure the circuit ID
parameter here.
Configure the circuit ID format in the Circuit ID Syntax dialogue box,
and the system automatically generates the circuit ID information.
17.After the configuration, click OK.
Configuring the DHCPv4, DHCPv6 or PPPoE plus intermediate/replay agent
function
19.Configure the DHCPv4 relay agent function.
a. On the DHCPv4 tab, click Global to open the DHCP Global Configuration
dialogue box.
b. Select Enabled from the DHCPv4 Relay Agent drop–down list, and then click 
OK.
c. On the DHCPv4 tab, select the location, and then click Modify to open the 
DHCPv4 Configuration dialogue box. Table 2-55 describes the parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-161
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 2-55 Description of DHCPv4 Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
DHCPv4 Relay Agent Configure whether to enable the DHCPv4 relay agent function.
Trust Status Configure how to process the upstream DHCPv4 packets that
carry the port identification information.
 Trust: Reserve or replace the packets.
 Untrust: Discard or add the packets.
Policy  Keep: Reserve the original port identification information.
 Replace: Replace the original port identification information
with the local port identification information.
 Discard: Discard the upstream packets that carry the port
identification information.
 Add: Add port identification information to the original port
identification information.
d. Select Enabled from the DHCPv4 Relay Agent drop-down list, configure the
trust status and policy, and then click OK.
20.Configure the DHCPv6 relay agent function.
a. On the DHCPv6 tab, click Global to open the DHCPv6 Global Configuration
dialogue box.
b. Select Enabled from the DHCPv6 Relay Agent drop–down list, and then click 
OK.
c. On the DHCPv6 tab, select the location, and then click Modify to open the 
DHCPv6 Configuration dialogue box. Table 2-56 describes the parameters.
Table 2-56 Description of DHCPv6 Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
DHCPv6 Relay Agent Configure whether to enable the DHCPv6 relay agent function.
Trust Status Configure how to process the upstream DHCPv6 packets that
carry the port identification information.
 Trust: Reserve or replace the packets.
 Untrust: Discard or add the packets.
Policy  Keep: Reserve the original port identification information.
 Replace: Replace the original port identification information
with the local port identification information.
 Discard: Discard the upstream packets that carry the port
identification information.
2-162 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
 Add: Add port identification information to the original port
identification information.
d. Select Enabled from the DHCPv6 Relay Agent drop-down list, configure the
trust status and policy, and then click OK.
21.Configure the PPPoE intermediate agent function.
a. On the PPPoE Plus tab, click Global to open the PPPoE Global Configuration
dialogue box.
b. Select Enabled from the PPPoE Intermediate Agent drop–down list, and then
click OK.
c. On the PPPoE Plus tab, select the location, and then click Modify to open the 
PPPoE Configuration dialogue box. Table 2-57 describes the parameters.
Table 2-57 Description of PPPoE Plus Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
PPPoE Intermediate
Agent
Configure whether to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent
function.
Trust Status Configure how to process the upstream PPPoE packets that carry
the port identification information.
 Trust: Reserve or replace the packets.
 Untrust: Discard or add the packets.
Policy  Keep: Reserve the original port identification information.
 Replace: Replace the original port identification information
with the local port identification information.
 Discard: Discard the upstream packets that carry theport
identification information.
 Add: Add port identification information to the original port
identification information.
d. Select Enabled from the PPPoE Intermediate Agent drop-down list, configure
the trust status and policy, and then click OK.
--end--
2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port Identification
NMS supports different port identification modes. This procedure introduces how to
select the configuration mode, and configure the global parameters for the port location
function, including the node name, node ID type, circuit ID syntax enabling, and other
parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-163
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Profile Manager window, choose Port
Identification > Global and Mode. The global configuration and mode parameters
are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-110.
Figure 2-110 Port Identification Global Configuration Window
2. Select the configuration mode and configure the global port identification parameters.
Table 2-58 describes the configuration mode and global parameters.
Table 2-58 Description of Global Parameters and Mode
Parameter Description
Configuration Mode  Normal Mode: Perform the service and syntax configurations
based on the ports.
 Profile Mode: Create or modify the profiles according to the port
identification services and syntax, and then apply the profiles to
the specified ports, VLANs or apply one profile globally, which
meets the carriers' requirements of diversified syntax and simple
configuration.
Node Name Configure the node name when Node ID Type is set to be Access
Node Name.
2-164 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Node ID Type The circuit ID identifies the subscriber line and subscriber physical
location.
This parameter refers to the access-node-identifier type in the circuit
ID:
 Inband MAC: Use the NE in-band MAC address as the access-
node-identifier type.
 Access Node Name: Use the NE node name as the access-node-
identifier type.
 System Name/Hostname: Use the NE system name or host name
as the access-node-identifier type.
Rack/Shelf Configure the rack and shelf information used in the circuit ID.
DHCPv4 Access Loop
Characteristics
Select the TR-101 loop characteristics parameters used in the
DHCPv4 packets.
PPPoE Access Loop
Characteristics
Select the TR-101 loop characteristics parameters used in the
PPPoE packets.
DHCPv4 Relay Agent Configure whether to enable the DHCPv4 relay agent function.
DHCPv6 Relay Agent Configure whether to enable the DHCPv6 relay agent function.
DHCPv6 Relay Agent
Work Mode
 LDRA: When the NE uses cards and control and switching card
to forward the DHCPv6 packets, LDRA specification is followed,
and the relay-forward information is added to the packets during
the layer-2 forwarding and layer-3 forwarding
 Non-LDRA: When the NE uses cards and control and switching
card to forward the DHCPv6 packets, LDRA specification is
not followed, and the relay-forward information is added to the
packets only during the layer-2 forwarding.
PPPoE Intermediate
Agent
Configure whether to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent function.
NDP Configure whether to enable the NDP function.
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
2.10.3 Configuring a Circuit ID Syntax Profile
When the circuit ID syntax function is enabled, you can customize a circuit ID syntax.
The NE obtains the variable domain values according to their configuration sequence
and generates the circuit ID, which includes the separator and output width. The circuit
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-165
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
ID information is added to the PPPoE plus or DHCP packets, and used for network
authentication and prevention of the illegal users' access.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Context
NMS has predefined seven syntax profiles, and these profiles cannot be modified and
deleted.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Port
Identification > Syntax Profile. The syntax profile parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-111.
Figure 2-111 Syntax Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in profile list, enter the name in the Syntax Profile Name text box, and
then click New Profile.
3. Select the newly-created syntax profile in profile list, and then click New Component
to open the Add Component dialogue box.
4. Configure the index for one component, and then configure other parameters. Table
2-59 describes the parameters in the Add Component window.
2-166 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Table 2-59 Description of Circuit ID Component Parameters
Parameter Description
Component Index Used to identify the variable domains and their locations in the
Circuit ID syntax.
Component Type  Standard Variable: All the variable domains defined in the
TR101 standard
 Extended Variable: Self-defined variable domains,
supporting ONU-ID, GEM Port, SVLAN, CVLAN, SN, LOID,
LOID Password, and user-defined circuit ID.
 Separator: Used to separate the keywords
 User Defined String: Configuer the user customized strings.
Component Content Configure the component content of each variable domain.
Component Width Configure the output width of each variable domain.
The circuit ID domain cannot exceed 63 characters. If the
length exceeds 63 characters, the NE intercepts the first 63
characters and generates an alarm.
5. After configuring one circuit ID component, click OK.
6. (Optional) Click New Component to add another circuit ID component.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply a syntax profile to NEs in
batches
1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles list, and then click
.
3. Click Apply to open the Batch Operation – Batch Apply
Profiles window.
4. Select the NE types and NEs, and then click Start to apply
the selected profile to the specified NEs in batches.
Delete a syntax profile from the
NEs in batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles list, and then click
.
3. Click Apply to open the Batch Operation – Batch Delete
Profiles window.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-167
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
4. Select the NE types and NEs, click Start to delete the
selected profile from the specified NEs in batches.
2.10.4 Configuring Remote ID
When the circuit ID information is not enough to identify one subscriber line, remote ID
is used. The remote ID information is appended to the circuit ID information for the port
identification purpose.
This procedure introduces how to configure the remote ID.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The circuit ID syntax has been configured. For more information about the configuration,
see 2.10.3 Configuring a Circuit ID Syntax Profile.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Port
Identification > Remote ID. The remote ID configuration parameters are displayed
on the right, see Figure 2-112.
Figure 2-112 Remote ID Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot (for example, an DSL card is selected), port, and PVC.
3. Select the location, and then click Modify to open the Modify Remote ID dialogue
box.
2-168 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
4. Configure the remote ID parameters according to the request. Table 2-60 describes
the remote ID parameters.
Table 2-60 Description of Remote ID Parameters
Parameter Description
Remote ID Enabling When the Circuit ID cannot identify a subscriber line uniquely,
the remote ID is used as a supplementary to identifythe
subscriber line.
Remote ID Used to identify the remote host of a circuit port.
The Remote ID can be any string that does not exceed 63
characters.
Remote ID Protocol Select the protocol that the remote ID will be applied to.
Syntax Profile Select the syntax profile that the remote ID will be applied to.
5. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.10.5 Configure Port Identification (Normal Mode)
NMS supports two configuration modes for the port identification function. Normal mode
is used to perform the service and syntax configurations based on the ports.
PPPoE Plus is used to authenticate and identify the PPPoE dial-up subscribers. DHCP
Option 82 is used to authenticate and identify the subscribers that dynamically apply for
IP addresses.
This procedure introduces how to configure the DHCP option82 or PPPoE plus for the
port identification function.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The global port identification parameters have been configured, and the configuration
mode is set to be Normal Mode. For more information about the global parameter
configuration, see 2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port
Identification.
 The circuit ID has been configured. For more information about the circuit ID
configuration, see 2.10.3 Configuring a Circuit ID Syntax Profile.
 The remote ID has been configured. For more information about the remote ID
configuration, see 2.10.4 Configuring Remote ID.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-169
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Context
 PPPoE Plus Principle
Figure 2-113 shows the PPPoE Plus principles.
Figure 2-113 PPPoE Plus Principle
PADI: PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation PADO: PPPoE Active Discovery Offer
PADR: PPPoE Active Discovery Request PADS: PPPoE Active Discovery Session-
Confirmation
PADT: PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate PPPoE: Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet
LCP: Link Control Protocol NCP: Network Control Protocol
The PPPoE Intermediate Agent intercepts all the PPPoE Discovery packets,
including PADI, PADO, PADR, PADS, and PADT packets.
The PPPoE Intermediate Agent performs the following functions.
→ Adding the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to the upstream PPPoE Discovery
packets, that is, the PADI and PADR packets
→ Removing the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID from the downstream PPPoE
Discovery packets, that is, the PADO and PADS packets
If a PADI or PADR packet exceeds 1500 bytes after being added with the DSL circuit
ID, the PPPoE Intermediate Agent does not need to send the modified data packet to
the broadband gateway, but sends the response packet (PADO or PADS packet) with
the Generic-Error tag to the PPPoE client.
 DHCP Option 82 Principle
Figure 2-114 shows the DHCP Option 82 principles.
2-170 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-114 DHCP Option 82 Principle
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
The DHCP Relay Agent intercepts the broadcast packets that the client sends to
the DHCP server, including the DHCP Discover, DHCP Offer, DHCP Request, and
DHCP Inform packets.
The DHCP Relay Agent performs the following functions.
→ Adding the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID to the upstream DHCP broadcast packets
that are received from the client
→ Removing the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID from the downstream reply packets
that are sent by the DHCP Server
→ Forwarding the valid broadcast packets with the Circuit ID and/or Remote ID that
are sent by other DHCP Relay Agents
If a DHCP broadcast packet exceeds the maximum packet length after being added
with the Agent option, the DHCP Relay Agent will discard the packet directly and
increase the error count.
Steps
Selecting the port for the port identification configuration
2. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Port
Identification > Normal Mode > Port Identification. The port identification
configuration parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-115.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-171
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-115 Port Identification Configuration Window
3. Specify the rack, shelf, card, port, and PVC/ONU to select the user port to configure
the port identification function.
Configuring the port identification global parameters
5. On the General tab, select one location, and then click Modify to open the General
Configuration dialogue box.
6. Select one syntax profile from the Syntax Profile drop-down list, and configure
whether to enable the access loop characteristics function, and then click OK.
Configuring the DHCPv4, DHCPv6 or PPPoE plus intermediate/replay agent
function
8. Configure the DHCPv4 relay agent function.
a. On the DHCPv4 tab, select the location to modify, and then click Modify to open
the DHCP Configuration dialogue box.
b. Select Enabled from the DHCPv4 Relay Agent drop-down list, configure the
trust status and policy. Table 2-61 describes the parameters.
Table 2-61 Description of DHCPv4 Port Identification Parameters
Parameter Description
DHCPv4 Relay Agent Configure whether to enable the DHCPv4 relay function.
Trust Status Configure how to process the upstream DHCP packets that
carry the port identification information.
 Trust: Reserve or replace the packets.
 Untrust: Discard or add the packets.
2-172 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Policy  Keep: Reserve the original port identification information.
 Replace: Replace the original port identification
information with the local port identification information.
 Discard: Discard the upstream packets that carry the port
identification information.
 Add: Add port identification information to the original port
identification information.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
9. Configure the DHCPv6 relay agent function.
a. On the DHCPv6 tab, select the location to modify, and then click Modify to open
the DHCPv6 Configuration dialogue.
b. Select Enabled from the DHCPv6 Relay Agent drop-down list, configure the
trust status, policy, and work mode. Table 2-62 describes the parameters.
Table 2-62 Description of DHCPv6 Port Identification Parameters
Parameter Description
DHCPv6 Relay Agent Configure whether to enable the DHCPv6 relay function.
Trust Status Configure how to process the upstream DHCP packets that
carry the port identification information.
 Trust: Reserve or replace the packets.
 Untrust: Discard or add the packets.
Policy  Keep: Reserve the original port identification information.
 Replace: Replace the original port identification
information with the local port identification information.
 Discard: Discard the upstream packets that carry the port
identification information.
 Add: Add port identification information to the original port
identification information.
DHCPv6 Relay Agent Work
Mode
 Non-LDRA: When the NE uses cards and control and
switching card to forward the DHCPv6 packets, LDRA
specification is not followed, and the relay-forward
information is added to the packets only during the
layer-2 forwarding.
 LDRA: When the NE uses cards and control and
switching card to forward the DHCPv6 packets,
LDRA specification is followed, and the relay-forward
information is added to the packets during the layer-2
forwarding and layer-3 forwarding
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-173
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
 Invalid: The work mode is determined by the global port
identification configuration. About more information, see
2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port
Identification.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
10.Configure the PPPoE intermediate agent function.
a. On the PPPoE Plus tab, select the location to modify, and then click Modify to
open the PPPoE Configuration dialoguebox.
b. Select Enabled from the PPPoE Intermediate Agent drop-down list, configure
the trust status and policy. Table 2-63 describes the parameters.
Table 2-63 Description of PPPoE Plus Port Identification Parameters
Parameter Description
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Configure whether to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent
function.
Trust Status Configure how to process the upstream PPPoE packets that
carry the port identification information.
 Trust: Reserve or replace the packets.
 Untrust: Discard or add the packets.
Policy  Keep: Reserve the original port identification information.
 Replace: Replace the original port identification
information with the local port identification information.
 Discard: Discard the upstream packets that carry the port
identification information.
 Add: Add port identification information to the original port
identification information.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.10.6 Configure Port Identification (Profile Mode)
NMS supports two modes for the port identification configuration. Profile mode is used to
create or modify the profiles according to the port identification services and syntax, and
then apply the profiles to the specified ports, VLANs or apply one profile globally.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
2-174 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The global port identification parameters have been configured, and the configuration
mode is set to be Profile Mode. For more information about the global parameter
configuration, see 2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port
Identification.
 The circuit ID has been configured. For more information about the circuit ID
configuration, see 2.10.3 Configuring a Circuit ID Syntax Profile.
 The remote ID has been configured. For more information about the remote ID
configuration, see 2.10.4 Configuring Remote ID.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Port
Identification > Profile Mode > Operator Profile. The operator profile
configuration parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-116.
Figure 2-116 Operator Profile Configuration Window
2. Select New in the operator profile list, and then enter the name in the Profile Name
text box.
3. Configure the syntax profile, configure the DHCP or PPPoE plus parameters. Table
2-64 describes the operator profile parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-175
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 2-64 Description of Operator Profile Parameters
Parameter Description
ATM Syntax Profile Select the syntax profile for the ATM services.
PTM/Ethernet Syntax Profile Select the syntax profile for the PTM or Ethernet services.
PON Syntax Profile Select the syntax profile for the PON services.
LAN Syntax Profile Select the syntax profile for the LAN services.
DHCPv4/v6 Relay Agent Enabling Configure whether to enable the DHCPv4/6 layer-2 relay
agent funciton.
DHCPv4/6 Relay Agent Trust
Status
Configure how to process the upstream DHCPv4/v6 packets
that carry the port identification information.
 Trust: Reserve or replace the packets.
 Untrust: Discard or add the packets.
DHCPv4/6 Relay Agent Policy  Keep: Reserve the original port identification information.
 Replace: Replace the original port identification
information with the local port identification information.
 Discard: Discard the upstream packets that carry the
port identification information.
 Add: Add port identification information to the original
port identification information.
DHCPv6 Relay Agent Work Mode  LDRA: When the NE uses cards and control and
switching card to forward the DHCPv6 packets,
LDRA specification is followed, and the relay-forward
information is added to the packets during the layer-2
forwarding and layer-3 forwarding
 Non-LDRA: When the NE uses cards and control and
switching card to forward the DHCPv6 packets, LDRA
specification is not followed, and the relay-forward
information is added to the packets only during the
layer-2 forwarding.
 Invalid: Select this option, and the DHCPv6 relay agent
work mode is decided by the configuration in the port
identification global and mode configuration window, see
2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port
Identification.
DHCP Access Loop
Characteristics
Select the DHCP access loop characteristics defined in
TR-101 about DSL line.
PPPoE Intermediate Agent
Enabling
Configure whether to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent
function.
2-176 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Trust
Status
Configure how to process the upstream PPPoE packets that
carry the port identification information.
 Trust: Reserve or replace the packets.
 Untrust: Discard or add the packets.
PPPoE Intermediate Agent Policy  Keep: Reserve the original port identification information.
 Replace: Replace the original port identification
information with the local port identification information.
 Discard: Discard the upstream packets that carry the
port identification information.
 Add: Add port identification information to the original
port identification information.
PPPoE Access Loop
Characteristics
Select the PPPoE access loop characteristics defined in
TR-101 about DSL line.
Relay Session ID Configure the tag relay session ID of the operator profile.
If value is set to be 65535, the tag is disabled. If value
ranges from 0 to 65534, the tag is enabled. It is used by
PPPoE and PPPoA services.
PPP-Max_Payload Enabling Configure whether to add the tag PPP-Max-Payload status
of the operator profile. It is used by PPPoE and PPPoA
services.
DSLF-IWF-PPPoE Enabling Configure whether to add the tag DSLF-IWF-PPPoE status
of the operator profile.
If this option is enabled, it will add suboption 0xFE to
indicate that PPPoA client sessions have turned into PPPoE
sessions. It is used only by PPPoA sevice.
4. After the configuration, click Apply to create a profile.
--end--
Related Tasks
To Do This
Apply an operator profile to NEs
in batches
1. Click Batch Apply to open the Batch Apply Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles list, and then click
.
3. Click Apply to open the Batch Operation – Batch Apply
Profiles window.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-177
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
To Do This
4. Select the NE types and NEs, and then click Start to apply
the selected profile to the specified NEs in batches.
Delete an operator profile from
the NEs in batches
1. Click Batch Delete to open the Batch Delete Profiles
dialogue box.
2. Select a profile in the Available Profiles list, and then click
.
3. Click Apply to open the Batch Operation – Batch Delete
Profiles window.
4. Select the NE types and NEs, click Start to delete the
selected profile from the specified NEs in batches.
2.10.7 Applying an Operator Profile Globally
This procedure introduces how to apply an operator profile globally.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The global port identification parameters have been configured, and the configuration
mode is set to be Profile Mode. For more information about the global parameter
configuration, see 2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port
Identification.
 The circuit ID has been configured. For more information about the circuit ID
configuration, see 2.10.3 Configuring a Circuit ID Syntax Profile.
 The remote ID has been configured. For more information about the remote ID
configuration, see 2.10.4 Configuring Remote ID.
 The operator profiles have been configured. For more information about the operator
profile configuration, see 2.10.6 Configure Port Identification (Profile Mode).
Context
In profile mode, the operatorprofiles can been applied to the port, VLAN and globally.
The system will process the protocol packets based on the profile configurations. The
profile applied to port is if the highest priority, and the profile applied globally is of the
lowest priority.
2-178 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Port
Identification > Profile Mode > Operator Profile Applying > Global. The
operator profile global application parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure
2-117.
Figure 2-117 Global Profile Application
2. Select a profile from the Global Operator Profile drop-down list, and then click 
Apply.
--end--
2.10.8 Applying an Operator Profile to VLAN
This procedure introduces how to apply an operator profile to VLAN.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The global port identification parameters have been configured, and the configuration
mode is set to be Profile Mode. For more information about the global parameter
configuration, see 2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port
Identification.
 The circuit ID has been configured. For more information about the circuit ID
configuration, see 2.10.3 Configuring a Circuit ID Syntax Profile.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-179
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
 The remote ID has been configured. For more information about the remote ID
configuration, see 2.10.4 Configuring Remote ID.
 The operator profiles have been configured. For more information about the operator
profile configuration, see 2.10.6 Configure Port Identification (Profile Mode).
Context
In profile mode, the operator profiles can been applied to the port, VLAN and globally.
The system will process the protocol packets based on the profile configurations. The
profile applied to port is if the highest priority, and the profile applied globally is of the
lowest priority.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Port
Identification > Profile Mode > Operator Profile Applying > VLAN. The operator
profile VLAN application parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-118.
Figure 2-118 Profile VLAN Application Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Setting VLAN Operator Profile dialogue box.
3. Configure the VLAN, select the profile to apply, and then click OK.
--end--
2.10.9 Applying an Operator Profile to Port
This procedure introduces how to apply an operator profile to port.
2-180 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
Before the operation, make sure that:
 The global port identification parameters have been configured, and the configuration
mode is set to be Profile Mode. For more information about the global parameter
configuration, see 2.10.2 Configuring Global Parameters and Mode for Port
Identification.
 The circuit ID has been configured. For more information about the circuit ID
configuration, see 2.10.3 Configuring a Circuit ID Syntax Profile.
 The remote ID has been configured. For more information about the remote ID
configuration, see 2.10.4 Configuring Remote ID.
 The operator profiles have been configured. For more information about the operator
profile configuration, see 2.10.6 Configure Port Identification (Profile Mode).
Context
In profile mode, the operator profiles can been applied to the port, VLAN and globally.
The system will process the protocol packets based on the profile configurations. The
profile applied to port is if the highest priority, and the profile applied globally is of the
lowest priority.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose Port
Identification > Profile Mode > Operator Profile Applying > Port. The operator
profile port application parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-119.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-181
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-119 Profile Port Application Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, card, port, and PVC/ONU to select the user port to apply the
profile.
3. Click New to open the Setting Port Operator Profile dialogue box.
4. Select a profile to apply, configure the related port parameters, and then click OK.
--end--
2.11 L2 Protocol Management
2.11.1 ACL
2.11.1.1 Configuring ACL
This procedure describes how to configure an ACL and configure the rules. You can use
the ACL rules to filter the traffic on the uplink port or user port and manage the traffic
that meets the ACL rules.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
2-182 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Context
ACL is a set of permission and denial rules, which are used to filter specific packets
according to the certain conditions. The relevant NE then permits or denies the packets
according to preset policies.
The ACL and QoS can be used together to enhance NE security.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose ACL > ACL
Configuration. The ACL parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-120.
Figure 2-120 ACL Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add ACL Configuration dialogue box.
3. Configure the ACL parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-65 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-65 Description of ACL Parameters
Parameter Description
ACL Type  Standard: Used for management ACL to restrict the external
devices to access the NE
The source IP address is used to control the received IP
packets
Range: 1–99
 Extended: Extended ACL, ranging from 100 to 199
 Link: Link ACL, ranging from 200 to 299
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-183
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
 Hybrid: IPv4 hybrid type, ranging from 300 to 399, used to
match the source/destination MAC address, source VLAN ID,
source/destination IP address, TCP source/destination port
number, and UDP source/destination port number
 IPv6 Extended:: IPv6 extended ACL, ranging from 500 to 599
 IPv6 Hybrid: IPv6 hybrid ACL, ranging from 600 to 699
ACL Index ACL ID
The ACL index range varies with the ACL type.
ACL Alias ACL name
4. Configure the ACL matching rules.
a. Select the newly-created ACL, and then click Rule to open the ACL Rule
Configuration dialogue box.
b. Click New to open the Add ACL Rule Configuration dialogue box.
c. Configure the ACL rule parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-66 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-66 Description of ACL Rule Parameters
Parameter Description
ACL Rule ID Up to 127 rules can be configured.
Access Control  Permit: Permit the packets that match the rule.
 Deny: Deny the packets that match the rule.
IP Protocol Manage the IP protocol stack.
The protocol types include GRE, IGMP, OSPF, PIM, TCP, UDP
and VRRP.
Source/Destination
Address
Source or destination IP address
Source/Destination
Address Wildcard
IP address wildcard
Source/Destination
Operation
Configure the matching rules for the source or destination port
 eq: Equal
 ge: Greater than and equal to
 le: Less than and equal to
 range: Port number range
Source Starting/Ending
Port
Source port number range of the protocol
2-184 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Destination Starting/Ending
Port
Destination port number range of the protocol
Ethernet Protocol Ethernet protocol type
Precedence Precedence field in the IP packet, mutually exclusive to DSCP
TOS Type of service, mutually exclusive to DSCP
DSCP DSCP priority
SVLAN Priority Service VLAN priority
SVLAN ID Service VLAN ID
CVLAN Priority User VLAN priority
CVLAN ID User VLAN ID
Source/DestinationMAC Source or destination MAC address
Source/Destination MAC
Wildcard
MAC address wildcard
5. Configure the traffic limit parameters.
a. In the ACL Rule Configuration dialogue box, select the newly-created rule,
and then choose Advanced > Traffic Limit. The Traffic Limit Configuration
dialogue box is displayed.
b. Configure the traffic limit parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-67 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-67 Description of Traffic Limit Parameters
Parameter Description
Status Select Configured to configure the traffic limit parameters.
Traffic Limit Mode Color sensitivity mode
 Color Blindness: The NE considers all the received packets
to be green and marks the packets with colors according to
the configured parameters.
 Color Sensitivity: The NE identifies the packet colors
according to the DSCP priorities, marks the packets with
colors according to the configured parameters, and then
determines the packet colors.
CIR Committed Information Rate
CBS Committed burst size, which must be greater than the maximum
packet length
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-185
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
EBS Excess burst size
PIR Peak information rate, which is greater than the CIR
PBS Peak burst size, which is greater than the CBS, unit: KB
Forward Red Packet Select Yes to forward the red packets.
Drop Yellow Packet Select Yes to drop the yellow packets.
Remarked Red Drop
Precedence
Modify the drop priority of the red packets.
Remarked Yellow Drop
Precedence
Modify the drop priority of the yellow packets.
Remarked Red DSCP Modify the DSCP priority of the red packets.
Remarked Yellow DSCP Modify the DSCP priority of the yellow packets.
You can configure different parameters to select different traffic limiting policies.
The NE supports the following policies.
Single-rate three-color marking algorithm:
Mark packets according to the CIR, CBS, and
EBS parameters.
This algorithm uses the packet length, rather
than the packet rate, to determine the packet
legality. It is based on the ACL rate limiting
rule.
 If the length of a packet does not exceed
the CBS, the packet is marked with green.
 If the length of a packet exceeds the EBS,
the packet is marked with red.
Dual-rate three-color marking algorithm:
Mark packets according to the CIR and PIR
parameters.
 If the rate of a packet does not exceed the
CIR, the packet is marked with green.
 If the rate of a packet is between the CIR
and PIR, the packet is marked with yellow.
 If the rate of a packet exceeds the PIR,
the packet is marked with red.
6. Configure the priority mark parameters.
a. In the ACL Rule Configuration dialog box, select the newly-created rule, and
then choose Advanced > Priority Mark. The Priority Marking Configuration
dialogue box is displayed.
b. Configure the priority of the traffic that matches the ACL rule, and then click OK.
The traffic can then obtain the services matching the priority. Table 2-68 describes
the parameters.
2-186 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Table 2-68 Description of Priority Mark Parameters
Parameter Description
Priority Marking Status Select Configured to configure the priority mark parameters.
Marked DSCP Priority Configure the DSCP priority of the traffic.
Marked CoS Priority Configure the CoS priority of the traffic.
Drop Precedence Configure the drop precedence level of the traffic, including:
 Low
 Medium
 High
Precedence Configure the ToS priority of packets.
Local Precedence Configure the local priority of packets.
 Note
The ToS priority and the DSCP priority are mutually exclusive, and cannot be
configured together.
The CoS priority and the local precedence are mutually exclusive, and cannot be
configured together.
7. Configure the redirection parameters.
a. In the ACL Rule Configuration dialog box, select the newly-created rule, and
then choose Advanced > Redirect. The Redirection Configuration dialogue
box is displayed.
b. Redirect the traffic that matches the ACL rules to the specified port, CPU, or next-
hop IP address for forwarding. Click OK. Table 2-69 describes the parameters.
Table 2-69 Description of Redirection Parameters
Parameter Description
Redirection Status Select Configured to configure the redirection mark parameters.
Redirection Type  CPU: Send the packets to the CPU.
 Port: Send the packets to the specified port.
 Next Hop: Send the packets to the specified next-hop IP
address.
Next Hop IP Address Configure the next hop IP address when the Redirection Type is
set to be Next Hop.
8. Configure the traffic mirroring parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-187
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
a. In the ACL Rule Configuration dialog box, select the newly-created rule,
and then choose Advanced > Traffic Mirroring. The Traffic Mirroring
Configuration dialogue box is displayed.
b. Mirror the traffic that matches the ACL rules to the specified port, and then click 
OK. Table 2-70 describes the parameters.
 Note
This operation does not affect traffic receiving and sending on the mirroring
source port. You can analyze the traffic on the mirroring source port to analyze
the traffic.
Table 2-70 Description of Traffic Mirroring Parameters
Parameter Description
Traffic Mirroring Status Select Configured to configure the traffic mirroring parameters.
Traffic Mirroring Type  CPU: Mirror the packets to the CPU.
 Port: Mirror the packets to the specified port.
 RSPAN: Mirror the packets to the device in the same layer-2
network.
 ERSPAN: Mirror the packets to the device in the same
layer-3 network.
Destination Port The destination port of the packets that will be mirrored to
VLAN ID Configure the VLAN ID of the packets to be mirrored when the 
Traffic Mirroring Type is set to be RSPAN or ERSPAN.
CoS Configure the CoS of the packets to be mirrored when the 
Traffic Mirroring Type is set to be RSPAN or ERSPAN.
TPID Configure the TPID of the packets to be mirrored when the 
Traffic Mirroring Type is set to be RSPAN or ERSPAN.
Destination Address Type Configure the type of the destination IP address.
Destination IP Address Configure the destination IP address that the packets will be
mirrored to.
Source Address Type Configure the type of the source IP address.
Source IP Address Configure the source IP address from which the packets will be
mirrored.
TTL Configure the TTL value of the packets that will be mirrored.
DSCP Configure the DSCP of the packets that will be mirrored.
2-188 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Destination MAC Address Configure the destination MAC address that the packets will be
mirrored to.
Source MAC Address Configure the source MAC address from which the packets will
be mirrored.
9. Configure the VLAN mark parameters.
a. In the ACL Rule Configuration dialog box, select the newly-created rule, and
then choose Advanced > VLAN Mark. The VLAN Marking Configuration
dialogue box is displayed.
b. Remark the VLAN ID for the traffic that matches the ACL rules, and then click 
OK. Table 2-71 describes the parameters.
Table 2-71 Description of VLAN Mark Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN Marking Status Select Configured to configure the marked VLAN ID.
Marked VLAN ID Configrue the VLAN ID which will be marked to the traffic.
--end--
2.11.1.2 Binding ACL with Ports
This procedure describes how to bind the ACL with the uplink ports or user ports. The
ACL rules are used to filter and manage the traffic on the uplink ports and user ports.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 An ACL rule is configured.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose ACL > ACL
Binding. The ACL binding parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-121.
SJ-20200814113823-038| 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-189
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-121 ACL Binding Configuration Window
2. Select the rack, shelf, slot, and port.
3. Click New to open the Add ACL Binding Configuration dialogue box.
4. Configure the ACL binding parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-72 describes the
parameters.
Table 2-72 Description of ACL Binding Parameters
Parameter Description
Port Type  Bridge Port: xDSL PVC port
 Physical Port: xDSL port or Ethernet port
 GPON Vport: GPON card virtual port
 EPON Vport: EPON card virtual port
ONU ONU ID
Virtual Port Virtual port number
Range: 1 – 255
ACL Index The created ACL ID
Direction  Ingress: Apply the ACL rule to the port in the inbound
direction.
2-190 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
 Egress: Apply the ACL rule to the port in the outbound
direction.
--end--
2.11.1.3 Configuring ACL Statistics
This procedure describes how to collect statistics information of the traffic that match the
ACL rules and query the statistics information.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 An ACL is configured. For more information about the configuration, see 2.11.1.1
Configuring ACL.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose ACL > ACL
Statistics. The ACL statistics parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure
2-122.
Figure 2-122 ACL Statistics Configuration Window
2. Create the statistic objects.
a. Click New to open the Add ACL Statistics dialogue box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-191
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
b. Configure the ACL statistics parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-73 describes
the parameters.
Table 2-73 Description of ACL Statistics Parameters
Parameter Description
Packet Type  All: Collect statistics information of all the packets.
 Red: Collect statistics information of the packets that are
marked with red.
 Yellow: Collect statistics information of the packets that are
marked with yellow.
 Green: Collect statistics information of the packets that are
marked with green.
Statistics Type  Packet: Collect statistics information by packet count.
 Byte: Collect statistics information by byte.
3. Query the statistics information.
a. In the ACL Statistics window, query the statistics information of the created
objects. Click Refresh to refresh the statistics information.
b. Click Reset to reset the statistics value to be 0.
--end--
2.11.1.4 Configuring Management ACL
This procedure describes how to configure the management ACL, which limit other
devices to access the NE and control the source IP addresses of the received IP
packets.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Context
In actual networking application, the NE is configured with an in-band NM IP address
and is connected to the public network or private network through the uplink port. All
the devices in the network can access the NE. For the security purpose, only a few
devices are permitted to access the NE. Therefore, the NE provides the management
ACL function.
After the NE is bound with a management ACL, the NE discards the IP packets that do
not match the management ACL. The NE does not response to the ARP request packet
and ICMP packet whose source IP addresses are not in the management ACL. This
2-192 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
prevents illegal devices from attacking the NE by obtaining the NE MAC address and IP
address.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose ACL > 
Management ACL Configuration. The management ACL parameters are displayed
on the right, see Figure 2-123.
Figure 2-123 Management ACL Configuration Window
2. Create a management ACL.
a. Click New to open the Add Management ACL Configuration dialogue box.
b. Configure the management ACL parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-74
describes the parameters.
Table 2-74 Description of Management ACL Parameters
Parameter Description
Management ACL Management ACL ID
Range: 1–99
Management ACL Alias Management ACL name
3. Configure the management ACL parameters.
a. Select the newly-created management ACL, and then click Rule to open the 
Management ACL Rule Configuration dialogue box.
b. Click New to open the Add Management ACL Rule Configuration dialogue
box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-193
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
c. Configure the management ACL rule parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-75
describes the parameters.
Table 2-75 Description of Management ACL Rule Parameters
Parameter Description
Management ACL Rule ID Management ACL rule ID
Up to 127 rules are supported.
Access Control  Permit: Permit the packets that match the rule.
 Deny: Deny the packets that match the rule.
Source Address/Source
Address Wildcard
Source IP address or wildcard
--end--
2.11.1.5 Binding Management ACL with Protocol
This procedure describes how to bind a management ACL with the NM protocol to
control the external devices to access the NE.
ZXA10 C300M is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The management ACL is configured. For more information about the management
ACL configuration, see 2.11.1.4 Configuring Management ACL.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose ACL
> Management ACL Binding. The management ACL binding parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-124.
2-194 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Figure 2-124 Management ACL Binding Configuration Window
2. Select a protocol, and then click Modify to open the Modify Management ACL
Binding Configuration dialogue box.
3. Configure the management ACL binding parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-76
describes the parameters.
Table 2-76 Description of Management ACL Binding Parameters
Parameter Description
Protocol  Telnet: Control the external devices to access the NE
through Telnet.
 SNMP: Control the external devices to configure and
manage the NE through SNMP.
ACL Binding Index Management ACL ID
Not Bound External devices are allowed to access the NE.
--end--
2.11.1.6 Binding ACL with VLAN
This procedure introduces how to bind an ACL with the a VLAN. The ACL is used to
control and filter the traffic data of the specified VLAN.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-195
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
 The ACL rule is created. For more information about creating an ACL rule, see
2.11.1.1 Configuring ACL.
 The VLAN is created.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose ACL > ACL
VLAN Binding. The ACL VLAN binding configuration parameters are displayed on
the right, see Figure 2-125.
Figure 2-125 ACL VLAN Binding Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add ACL Binding Configuration dialogue box.
3. Configure the ACL VLAN binding parameters. Table 2-77 describes the parameters.
Table 2-77 Description of ACL VLAN Binding Parameters
Parameter Description
VLAN ID Configure the VLAN ID to bind with the ACL.
Direction Configure the direction of the traffic that the ACL is applied to.
The direction includes Egress and ingress.
ACL Index Configure the index of the ACL rule to bind with the VLAN.
ACL Alias Configure the alias name of the ACL.
2-196 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
4. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.11.1.7 Binding ACL with Inner-ports
The inner-ports refers to the interfaces of the control and switching chip. Not all the ACL
rules can be applied tothe card interfaces. For some ACL rules, such as IPv6 rules, the
inner-port supports ACL binding function better than the ordinary card interfaces.
This procedure introduces how to bind an ACL with the inner-port.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The ACL rule is created. For more information about creating an ACL, see 2.11.1.1
Configuring ACL.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose ACL > ACL
Inner-port Binding, and the ACL inner-port binding configuration parameters are
displayed on the right, see Figure 2-126.
Figure 2-126 ACL Inner-port Binding Configuration Window
2. Select rack, shelf, slot, and then click New to open the Adding ACL Binding
Configuration dialogue box.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-197
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
3. Configure the inner-port, ACL index, and direction, and then click OK.
--end--
2.11.1.8 Configuring ACL Time Range
After an ACL is configured, you can configure the time period when the ACl rule works.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose ACL > ACL
Time Range, and the ACL time range configuration parameters are displayed on the
right, see Figure 2-127.
Figure 2-127 ACL Time Range Configuration Window
2. Click New to open the Add Time Range Configuration dialogue box.
3. Configure the time range parameters according to the request. Table 2-78 describes
the parameters.
Table 2-78 Description of Time Range Configuration Parameters
Parameter Description
Time Range Name Configure the name of time range rule.
Time Range Type There are two types, including:
 Only Once: The ACL will be applied and effective once.
 Weekly: The ACl will be applied and effective every week.
2-198 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
Once Starting/Ending Time Configure the starting time/ending time to apply the ACL when the 
Time Range Type is set to be Once.
Weekly Configure the day when the ACL is applied when the Time Range
Type is set to be Weekly.
Starting/Ending Time Configure the starting time/ending time to apply the ACL when the 
Time Range Type is set to be Weekly.
4. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.11.2 STP
2.11.2.1 Configuring STP Global Parameters
This procedure describes how to enable the STP and configure the STP global
parameters.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
Context
The STP is a link layer network protocol that ensures a loop-free topology for any
bridged LAN. It uses certain algorithms to block some redundant paths, which prevents
messages from proliferating and infinite recycling in the loop network.
The STP participates in the BPDU exchange among all the STP switches in an
extended LAN) The following operations are implemented through exchanging BPDU
messages.
 Select a root bridge in the stable spanning tree topology.
 Specify a switch in each switch network segment.
 Set the redundant switch port to Discard to avoid any loop in the network topology.
The following modes are supported.
 SSTP, complying to IEEE802.1d
 RSTP, complying to IEEE802.1w
 MSTP, complying to IEEE802.1s
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-199
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose STP > STP
Global. The STP global parameters are displayed in the right pane, see Figure
2-128.
Figure 2-128 STP Global Configuration Window
2. Configure the STP global parameters. Table 2-79 describes the parameters.
Table 2-79 Description of STP Global Parameters
Parameter Description
Protocol Type  Disabled: Disable the STP. You can configure Transparent Enable
to transparently transmit or discard the BPDU packets. By default,
the BPDU packets are discarded.
 SSTP: Enable the SSTP.
 RSTP: Enable the RSTP.
 MSTP: Enable the MSTP.
Default: Disabled
Bridge Maximum Aging
Time
Maximum aging time of the STP BPDU packets on a specified bridge
Default: 20 seconds
The NE checks whether the configuration packet received by the
port times out in accordance with the maximum aging time. If the
configuration packet times out, the spanning tree instance needs to be
recalculated.
2-200 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
If the NE is the root bridge, this parameter is used to verify the timeout.
If the NE is not the root bridge, the maximum aging time of the root
bridge is used to verify the timeout.
Bridge Hello Time Time interval that the specified NE STP sends BPDU packets
Default: 2 seconds
This parameter is used by the STP to periodically send the
configuration packets for the stability of the spanning tree.
If the NE does not receive configuration packets during a period, the
NE considers that the packet times out and recalculates the spanning
tree.
If the NE is the root bridge, this parameter is used to send the
configuration packet. If the NE is not the root bridge, the time interval of
the root bridge is used to send the configuration packet.
Bridge Forwarding
Delay
Forwarding delay time of the STP
Default: 15 seconds
To prevent temporary loop, when the port state changes from
Discarding to Forwarding and the fast changing conditions of the port
state are not met, the intermediate state Learning is set and state
changing needs certain time to synchronize with the remote switch
state changing.
The forwarding delay time of the root switch determines the time
interval of state changing. If the NE is the root bridge, this parameter is
used as the forwarding delay time. If the NE is not the root bridge, the
forwarding delay time of the root bridge is used.
Transparent Enable Configure whether to enable the STP transparent transmission function.
This parameter can be configured only when Protocol Type is set to be
Disabled.
When the STP transparent transmission function is enabled, the BPDU
packets are broadcast in the VLAN rather than being sent to theCPU
for processing.
Revision Configuration version in mst_config_id
This parameter is effective when Protocol Type is set to be MSTP.
When the switches need to be configured in one domain, this
parameter must be configured to keep the switch configuration
consistent.
Default: 0
Configuration Name Domain name in mst_config_id
This parameter is effective when Protocol Type is set to be MSTP.
Default: Management MAC address of the NE
Cisco MD5 Key MD5 Key value required by the digest in mst_config_id
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-201
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Parameter Description
This parameter is effective when Protocol Type is set to be MSTP.
Default: 0x13ac06a62e47fd51f95d2ba243cd0346
This parameter is used to ensure the device security. If the MD5 key
values of two devices in one MST domain are different, the devices
cannot communicate with each other.
The MSTP packet formats configured by some other providers, such as
Cisco and Huawei, are different from the IEEE standard. The switches
of ZTE Corporation can interwork with the devices of these providers in
a domain only when the key value or digest value is configured.
Cisco MD5 Digest MD5 digest value in mst_config_id
This parameter is effective when Protocol Type is se to be MSTP.
Default: 0x00000000000000000000000000000000
The MSTP packet formats configured by some other providers, such as
Cisco and Huawei, are different from the IEEE standard. The switches
of ZTE Corporation can interwork with the devices of these providers in
a domain only when the key value or digest value is configured.
 Note
The relation between the Bridge Maximum Aging Time, Bridge Hello Time, and 
Bridge Forwarding Delay parameters is as follows:
2 × (Bridge Forwarding Delay – 1.0 s) ≥ Bridge Maximum Aging Time ≥2 × (Bridge
Hello Time + 1.0 s)
The STP of the entire network can work effectively only when the relation described
above is met. Otherwise, the network is unstable.
3. After the configuration, click Apply.
--end--
2.11.2.2 Configuring an STP Instance
This procedure describes how to configure an MSTP instance. MSTP instances map
with VLANs. Each VLAN can be added to one instance. Different instances in an MST
domain can maintain different spanning tree structures to achieve load balance.
The NE supports 16 MSTP instances.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
2-202 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
 The STP type is set to be MSTP. For more information about the STP type
configuration, see 2.11.2.1 Configuring STP Global Parameters.
Context
 In SSTP mode and RSTP mode, there is only one instance 0, that is, CIST instance.
In MSTP mode, instance 0 exists by default, and cannot be deleted.
 To enter one MST domain, the bridges need to meet the following conditions.
→ The MST configuration names are the same.
→ The MST configuration versions are the same.
→ The instance-to-VLAN mapping tables are the same.
→ The devices are connected physically.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose STP > 
STP Instance. The STP instance parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure
2-129.
Figure 2-129 STP Instance Configuration Window
2. Create an MSTP instance.
a. Click New to open the STP Instance Configuration dialogue box.
b. Configure the MSTP instance parameters, and then click OK. Table 2-80
describes the parameters.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-203
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Table 2-80 Description of STP Instance Parameters
Parameter Description
Instance ID Instance ID, ranging from 0 to 32
Instance 0 exists by default and cannot be deleted.
Bridge Priority Priority of the NE in a specified spanning tree
Value range: 0 – 61440, with the step value of 4096
Default: 32768
The MSTP devices can have different priorities in different spanning
tree instances. The device priority determines whether the device
can be selected as the root bridge of the spanning tree. The device
with the smallest priority value is selected as the root bridge.
If the device priorities are the same, the device with the smallest
MAC address is selected as the root bridge.
VLAN Mapping Map the specified VLAN to the specified MSTP instance.
By default, all the VLANs are mapped to instance 0, that is, CIST.
One VLAN cannot be mapped to different instances. If you map a
VLAN that is already mapped to an instance to another instance,
the previous mapping relation is cancelled automatically.
Bridge Maximum Hops Maximum hops of the BPDU packets in the MST domain
Value range: 1 – 40
Default: 20
The hops of a BPDU packet in the domain decreases by 1 when
the packet passes a device, starting from the root bridge. The NE
discards the packet whose hop number is 0, to limit the domain
network scale.
c. After the configuration, click OK.
3. Configure the port parameters in different MSTP instances.
 Note
The port parameters are effective only after the port is added to the instance.
a. Select the newly-created instance, and then click Port Instance to open the STP
Port Instance Configuration dialogue box.
b. Select a port, and then click Modify to open the STP Port Instance
Configuration dialogue box.
c. Configure the port parameters for the instance. Table 2-81 describes the
parameters.
2-204 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Table 2-81 Description of the STP Port Instance Parameters
Parameter Description
Port Priority The port priority determines the port role in a spanning tree instance.
Generally, the smaller the value is, the higher the priority is. The
Ethernet port with the smallest priority value can be selected as the
root port.
Port Path Cost The port path cost affects the port role in a spanning tree instance.
Root Guard Enable After the root guard function is enabled and the port role changes to
root port or alternate port, the port status changes to Blocking. When
the port role changes to designated port, the port status changes to 
Forwarding.
d. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.11.2.3 Configuring STP Ports
This procedure describes how to configure the STP ports The STP port parameters
include link type, enabling STP, and enabling BPDU guard.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
 The NE Protocol Manager window is open.
 The STP type is configured. For more information about the STP type configuration,
see 2.11.2.1 Configuring STP Global Parameters
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose STP > STP
Port. The STP port parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-130.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-205
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network Access Equipment Management
Figure 2-130 STP Port Configuration Window
2. Select an uplink port, and then click Modify to open the STP Port Configuration
dialogue box .
3. Configure the STP port parameters. Table 2-82 describes the parameters.
Table 2-82 Description of STP Port Parameters
Parameter Description
STP Enable  On: Enable the STP.
 Off: Disable the STP.
If the global STP function is enabled but the port STP function is disabled,
the port will discard the BPDU packets.
Link Type Configure whether the port is connected with a point-to-point link.
 Share: The STP port is connected with a link that is not point-to-point.
 Auto: The STP checks whether the link connected to the port is point-
to-point.
 P2P: The STP port is connected with a point-to-point link. The two ports
connected with a point-to-point link can be switched to the Forwarding
state quickly by sending synchronization packets. This reduces the
forwarding delay time.
Edged Port Enable Configure whether to enable the edged port function, or set the port to be
an edged port.
The port can be switched from Blocking to Forwarding quickly and there
is no delay time.
Only the ports connected to the terminal devices can be set to be edged
ports.
2-206 SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0)
2 Protocol and Service Configuration
Parameter Description
BPDU Guard
Enable
Configure the mode to process the BPDU packets received by the port.
 Discard: BPDU packets are discarded.
 Shut down: Shut down the port.
 Disable: No BPDU guard measure is taken and the BPDU packets are
processed normally.
Packet Type BPDU packet type on the STP port
 If the peer device is provided by Cisco, the packet type is CISCO.
 If the peer device is provided by Harbour Networks Limited, the packet
type is HAMMER.
 If the peer device is provided by Huawei, the packet type is HUAWEI.
 If the device is not provided by the Cisco, Harbour Networks Limited, or
Huawei, the packet type is IEEE.
4. After the configuration, click OK.
--end--
2.11.3 LACP
2.11.3.1 Configuring LACP Aggregation Global Parameters
LACP is used to bind several physical ports together to form a single logical channel in
order to increase the throughput beyond what a single port can sustain, and to provide
redundancy in case one link fails.
This procedure introduces how to configure the LACP aggregation global load balance
mode, which is used to balance the traffic load among the LACP group members.
ZXA10 C300M v4 is used as an example.
Prerequisite
The control and switching card of the NE supports the configuration of the global LACP
aggregation load balance.
Steps
1. In the left navigation tree of the NE Protocol Manager window, choose LACP > 
LACP Aggregation Global Configuration, and the system load balance mode
configuration parameters are displayed on the right, see Figure 2-131.
SJ-20200814113823-038 | 2020-08-30 (R1.0) 2-207
NetNumen U31 R10 Fixed Network